665235
323
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/334
Next page
Appendix
Index
Try using various functions
1
Convenient
print
functions
2
3
Using
Utility
Software
4
Network
Setup
5
User's Manual
Advanced
C911
C931
C941
C942
ES9411
ES9431
ES9541
ES9542
Pro9431
Pro9541
Pro9542
Matching
Colors
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
- 2 -
z
Manual Conguration
The following user manuals are enclosed with the product.
The e-manual is stored as software on DVD-ROM.
Basic
Preparing the printer to print
Try using various functions
Read for any points that are not understood, or for maintenance
Using C941/C942/ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542
This guide describes the precautions for safe
use of the device. Make sure to read before use.
Further, basic uses from the device installation
methods to initial printing are also explained.
The device functions are described in the
appendix.
Read these guides as necessary
Advanced (This manual)
2
Step
This guide explains the various paper print methods
and how to use useful functions. Read to optimize the
printing environment or to adjust the color, etc., using
the enclosed utility software.
Further, this guide also explains the items that can be
set from the control panel, and the network settings.
Troubleshooting/Daily
Maintenance Manual
This manual explains the procedures for paper jams, and
troubleshooting method if an error message is displayed. This
manual also explains daily maintenance such as now to replace
consumables and maintenance units, and cleaning, etc.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
Consumables, maintenance products,
options, color management server,
etc.
Read this first
Set-up Guide
Opening the box and installing the printer
1
Step
This guide uses illustrations to explain the
methods from opening the box to installation.
For the advanced setup guide, see the "Basic".
Pamphlet
Checking the product
Parts nomenclature and functions
Using the device to its fullest
Installing the device
Turning ON and OFF the power supply
Test printing using the printer only
Connecting to a PC
Paper
Printing
Paper ejection
Setting Power Save mode
Setting auto power OFF
Checking the print quantity,
consumables, remaining maintenance
unit quantity, and remaining service life
Cancelling a print job
Adding printers using LPD protocols
(TCP/IP)
Table of control panel menu items
Basic Windows procedures
Printer specifications
Useful print functions
Adjusting the color
Using utility software
Network settings
Checking and changing printer settings
using the control panel
Separate Volume Spot Color Guide
This guide explains how to set up the Spot
Color kit and check the printer drivers, and
how to print using Spot Color. Make sure to
read before use.
Setting the Spot Color kit
Control panel explanation
Checking the printer drivers
Table of printer driver functions
Printing on color paper
Printing on transparent film
Specifying and printing Spot Color
toner using the applications
Fine-tuning white
Switching Spot Color kits
E-format
E-format
E-format
E-format
- 3 -
z
Reading the Manual
Symbols
Note
z
These are cautions and restrictions for the correct operation of the device. Make sure to read to avoid misoperation.
Memo
z
Knowledge of the information before using the device is useful and can act as a reference. Reading is recommended.
Reference
z
This are the reference pages. Read to learn detailed information and relevant information.
WARNING
z
Mishandling due to ignoring this display may cause death or serious injury.
CAUTION
z
Mishandling due to ignoring this display may cause personal injury.
Keys, Buttons, and Symbols
This chapter described the following keys, buttons, and symbols.
Inscription Explanation
[ ] button/key
z
The control panel buttons and 10-key pad are described below.
E.g.:
[OK] button [BACK] button
[Fn] key [CLEAR] key
z
Indicates your PC keyboard.
[ ]
z
Describes the menu name on the liquid crystal panel.
z
Describes the PC menus, windows, and dialog box names.
" "
z
Describes the messages and input text displayed in the liquid crystal
panel.
z
Describes the le and screen names on the PC.
z
Describes the reference title.
> Describes the menu level of the device or PC.
- 4 -
Illustrations
The device illustrations used herein show the
C931 model unless otherwise specied.
Illustrations may differ from the actual product.
Screens
The images of the control panel and PC used
herein are examples. The images may differ
from actual products and screens.
- 5 -
Inscriptions
The following inscriptions are used in this manual.
z
C911dn
C911
z
C931dn
C931
z
C941dn
C941
z
C942dn
C942
z
ES9411dn
ES9411
z
ES9431dn
ES9431
z
ES9541dn
ES9541
z
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 64-bit Edition operating system version
Windows 7 (64bit version)
z
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 operating system version
Windows 7
z
Mac OS X10.3.9 or later
Mac OS X
The manuals enclosed with the printer use as examples Windows 7 in the case of Windows, and OS X
10.8 in the case of Mac OS X unless otherwise specied.
Depending on the OS and model used, descriptions in this manual may differ.
- 6 -
Contents
Contents
Manual Conguration ........................................................................... 2
Reading the Manual
............................................................................. 3
Symbols .................................................................................................................. 3
Keys, Buttons, and Symbols....................................................................................3
Illustrations
............................................................................................................ 4
Screens...................................................................................................................4
Inscriptions
............................................................................................................ 5
1 Convenient print functions ................................................. 13
Printer driver functions table ............................................................. 14
Functions explanation .......................................................................................... 14
Windows PS printer driver functions .....................................................................................14
Windows PCL printer driver functions
...................................................................................16
Windows XPS printer driver functions
................................................................................... 17
Mac OS X PS printer driver functions
....................................................................................18
Printing on various papers ................................................................. 22
Printing on envelopes ........................................................................................... 22
Before setting ................................................................................................................... 22
Printing on standard size envelopes
.....................................................................................23
Printing on irregular size envelopes......................................................................................28
Printing on glossy paper ....................................................................................... 35
Printing on labels and transparencies
...................................................................41
Printing on user-selected paper sizes (custom pages and lengthy printing)
......... 47
Using custom media
............................................................................................. 52
Economy printing ............................................................................... 54
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet (multi-page printing) ...........................54
2-Sided Printing
................................................................................................... 56
Test printing with toner economy (toner economy mode)
....................................58
Changing sizes to print ...................................................................... 61
Enlarging/reducing pages .................................................................................... 61
Enlarging and printing multiple sheets (poster printing)
...................................... 63
Sorting pages to print pamphlets (booklets)
........................................................65
Clean printing .................................................................................... 67
Changing print quality (resolution) ...................................................................... 67
Printing sharper photos (photo mode)
.................................................................69
Printign text and lines sharply
.............................................................................. 69
Compensating ne lines........................................................................................ 71
Using printer fonts
............................................................................................... 73
- 7 -
Contents
Using PC fonts ...................................................................................................... 75
Printing print results so that people cannot see them ........................ 76
Entering passwords to print (Secure Print) ..........................................................76
Printing secret text (encrypted secure print)
.......................................................78
Correcting the Print Position on the Paper Using the Control Panel ... 81
Correcting the print start position ........................................................................81
Adjusting the Image Stretch (Print Length) Using the Control Panel
... 83
Adjusting the stretch of print results .................................................................... 83
Advanced print functions ................................................................... 85
Setting the page order .......................................................................................... 85
Printing documents in page order ........................................................................................85
Printing documents in reverse page order
............................................................................. 85
Printing single sheets manually ............................................................................ 87
Automatically selecting trays
............................................................................... 90
Printing only covers from a separate tray (cover printing)
...................................92
Stamping and printing (watermarks)
...................................................................93
Collate (sort printing)
........................................................................................... 95
Outputting portrait and landscape alternately using batch printing
......................97
Saving data for repeat printing
............................................................................. 99
Printing using registered forms (overlay printing)
............................................. 101
Automatically switching trays
............................................................................ 103
Using the printer buffer
...................................................................................... 106
Outputting to le without printing
...................................................................... 107
Downloading PostScript les
.............................................................................. 108
Printing PostScript errors
................................................................................... 109
Changing emulation modes
................................................................................ 109
Changing settings for mono printing
.................................................................. 110
Saving the printer driver settings
....................................................................... 111
Saving settings ............................................................................................................... 111
Calling and using saved settings
........................................................................................ 112
Changing the default printer driver settings ....................................................... 113
Deleting or updating printer drivers ................................................ 114
Deleting the printer drivers ................................................................................ 114
Updating the printer drivers
............................................................................... 115
2 Matching Colors ............................................................... 119
Matching colors using the control panel ........................................... 120
Manually compensating color drift ...................................................................... 120
Automatically compensating density and gradation
............................................ 120
Manually compensating density
.......................................................................... 121
Watermark adjustment for density compensation
.............................................. 122
- 8 -
Contents
Adjusting the color balance (density) ................................................................. 123
Adjusting the color balance
................................................................................ 126
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers ....................................... 128
Color matching ................................................................................................... 128
What is color matching? ................................................................................................... 128
Color matching (recommended) ......................................................................... 128
Easy color matching (Ofce colors)
.................................................................... 130
Color matching (GraphicPro)
.............................................................................. 133
Color matching (color matching OFF)
................................................................. 135
Changing black nish.......................................................................................... 137
Printing using monochrome (black and white)
................................................... 140
Rendering white lines between text and background inconspicuous
(black overprint)
................................................................................................ 142
Calibrating plate misalignment (trapping)
.......................................................... 143
Simulating print effects
...................................................................................... 145
Printing using color analysis (classication printing)
......................................... 148
Disabling the Postscript Color Matching.............................................................. 149
Matching Colors Using Utilities ........................................................ 150
Color Correct Utility ............................................................................................ 150
Changing palette colors (Windows) .................................................................................... 150
Changing palette colors (Macintosh)
.................................................................................. 154
Changing gamma values and hues (Windows)
..................................................................... 158
Changing gamma values and hues (Macintosh)
................................................................... 161
Saving color adjustment settings (Windows)
....................................................................... 163
Saving color matching settings (Macintosh)
........................................................................ 164
Importing color matching settings (Windows)
...................................................................... 165
Importing color matching settings (Macintosh)
.................................................................... 167
Deleting color matching settings (Windows)
........................................................................ 168
Deleting color matching settings (Macintosh)
...................................................................... 169
PS Gamma Adjuster ............................................................................................ 170
Registering gamma (Windows) .......................................................................................... 170
Registering gamma (Macintosh)
........................................................................................ 171
Color Swatch Utility ............................................................................................ 172
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 172
Printing RGB color samples
............................................................................................... 172
Prole assistant .................................................................................................. 173
Registering ICC proles
...................................................................................... 174
3 Using Utility Software ...................................................... 175
Utility software that can be used with the printer ............................ 176
Utilities table ...................................................................................................... 176
Windows/Macintosh common utilities ................................................................................. 176
Windows utilities
............................................................................................................. 176
- 9 -
Contents
Macintosh utilities ........................................................................................................... 178
Installing utilities ............................................................................................... 178
Windows ........................................................................................................................ 178
Macintosh
...................................................................................................................... 179
Windows utilities ............................................................................. 180
Conguration Tool .............................................................................................. 180
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 180
Installing
....................................................................................................................... 180
Registering devices
.......................................................................................................... 182
Device Info tab
............................................................................................................... 183
Network Setting plug-in
................................................................................................... 183
Storage Manager plug-in
.................................................................................................. 184
PDF Print Direct .................................................................................................. 187
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 187
Printing PDF les
............................................................................................................. 187
Print Job Accounting client ................................................................................. 188
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 188
Installing
....................................................................................................................... 188
Changing job account modes
............................................................................................ 188
Change the Printer Display Language ................................................................. 192
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 192
Switching the control panel language
................................................................................. 192
Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR) .................................................................. 194
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 194
Starting up
..................................................................................................................... 194
Downloading les to the printer
......................................................................................... 194
Checking/deleting/transferring jobs
................................................................................... 195
Checking the printer status
............................................................................................... 195
Adding printers
............................................................................................................... 196
Automatically transferring jobs
.......................................................................................... 196
Printing using multiple printers simultaneously
.................................................................... 197
Starting the web browser
................................................................................................. 198
Adding comments
........................................................................................................... 199
Setting IP addresses automatically
.................................................................................... 200
Uninstalling
.................................................................................................................... 200
Network Extension ............................................................................................. 201
Operations environment ................................................................................................... 201
Checking the printer settings
............................................................................................ 201
Setting options automatically
............................................................................................ 202
Uninstalling
.................................................................................................................... 202
Web Driver Installer ........................................................................................... 203
- 10 -
Contents
Mac OS X utilities ............................................................................. 204
Panel language setup ......................................................................................... 204
Setting the printer ........................................................................................................... 204
Print Job Accounting client ................................................................................. 205
Installing ....................................................................................................................... 205
Registering user IDs and user names
................................................................................. 205
Registering multiple users simultaneously
........................................................................... 205
Changing user IDs and user names.................................................................................... 206
Deleting user IDs and user names
..................................................................................... 206
Network Card Setup Utility ................................................................................. 207
Setting IP addresses ........................................................................................................ 207
Making web settings
........................................................................................................ 207
Finishing the Network Card Setup Utility
............................................................................. 208
4 Network Setup ................................................................. 209
Network setting items ..................................................................... 210
Initializing network settings
............................................................ 223
Using DHCP
...................................................................................... 224
Setting the DHCP server ................................................................................................... 224
Setting the printer
........................................................................................................... 225
Using SNMP ..................................................................................... 227
About IPv6....................................................................................... 228
Checking IPv6 addresses .................................................................................... 228
Setting the network from the web browser ..................................... 229
Operations environment ..................................................................................... 229
Starting up
......................................................................................................... 229
Logging in as an administrator
........................................................................... 230
Items table
......................................................................................................... 231
Changing administrator passwords
.................................................................... 233
Checking printer status from the PC
................................................................... 234
Changing printer settings from the PC
................................................................ 234
Encrypting communications (SSL/TLS)
.............................................................. 235
Printing using IPP
.............................................................................................. 237
Encrypting communications (IPSec)
................................................................... 239
Using the access restriction function (IP lter) with IP addresses
.....................246
Using the access restriction function with MAC addresses
.................................. 247
Notifying errors using e-mail
.............................................................................. 249
Notifying errors periodically using e-mail
........................................................... 251
Using SNMPv3
.................................................................................................... 254
Using IEEE802.1X
............................................................................................... 256
Changing EtherTalk printer names (Macintosh)
.................................................. 260
- 11 -
Contents
Changing EtherTalk zones (Macintosh) ............................................................... 260
Printing without printer drivers (Direct printing)
............................................... 261
Printing PDF les ............................................................................................................. 261
Setting the server to print mail attachments
....................................................................... 262
5 Checking and Changing Printer Settings Using the
Control Panel
................................................................... 263
Printing printer information ............................................................. 264
Printable report tables ........................................................................................ 264
Printing printer settings lists
.............................................................................. 265
Settings details ............................................................................................................... 265
Printing printer information lists ........................................................................ 266
Network information ........................................................................................................ 266
File list
.......................................................................................................................... 267
Demo pages
................................................................................................................... 267
Error log
........................................................................................................................ 268
Total print results
............................................................................................................ 268
Total print results Printing print lists .................................................................. 269
Font list ......................................................................................................................... 269
Color prole list
.............................................................................................................. 269
User media list
................................................................................................................ 270
Test prints
...................................................................................................................... 270
Registering custom sizes (irregular paper)......................................................... 271
Changing administrator passwords
.................................................................... 273
Restricting button operations (panel lockout)
................................................... 274
Restricting menu displays (menu lockout)
......................................................... 275
Checking print quantities ................................................................. 276
Checking remaining consumables and maintenance unit quantities
... 277
Table of setting items in the device setup screen............................. 278
Device setup screen ............................................................................................ 278
[Conguration]
................................................................................................... 279
[Print Information]
............................................................................................ 282
[Print Secure Job]
.............................................................................................. 283
[Menus]
.............................................................................................................. 284
[Admin Setup]
.................................................................................................... 297
[Print Statistics]
................................................................................................. 315
[Calibration]
....................................................................................................... 316
[Boot Menu]
....................................................................................................... 320
- 12 -
Contents
Appendix ............................................................................... 321
Using Print Job Accounting .............................................................. 322
Number of usable user IDs and logs ................................................................... 322
Character code table ........................................................................ 323
PostScript mode ................................................................................................. 323
PCL mode
........................................................................................................... 326
Index .................................................................................... 329
- 13 -
4
1
2
3
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
1
Convenient
print functions
Printer driver functions table …………… 14
Printing on various papers
……………… 22
Economy printing
…………………………… 54
Changing sizes to print
…………………… 61
Clean printing
………………………………… 67
Printing print results so that
people cannot see them
…………………… 76
Correcting the Print Position on
the Paper Using the Control Panel
…… 81
Adjusting the Image Stretch (Print
Length) Using the Control Panel
……… 83
Advanced print functions
………………… 85
Deleting or updating printer drivers
114
Note
z
This section uses [WordPad] for its Windows explanations, and [TextEditor] for its Mac OS X
explanations. Depending on the application, the screens and operations procedures may differ.
z
For detailed explanations of the printer driver and utility setup items, see "Online Help".
z
Due to printer driver and utility version upgrades, there may be differences from the descriptions
in this manual.
- 14 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Printer driver functions table
This section explains the convenient functions when printing from a PC.
Reference
z
For detailed explanations of the printer driver setup items, see "Online Help".
Functions explanation
There are three printer driver types for Windows
(PCL, PS, and XPS), and one printer driver type
for Mac OS X (PS). The functions may differ
depending on the printer driver.
Windows PS printer driver
functions
[Layout] tab
Item Explanation
Orientation Species the print orientation.
Print on Both
Sides
Species to use both sides
printing.
Page Order Species the order of the
document pages to be
printed.
Page Format Species the number of pages
and small leaet printing
to be printed on 1 sheet of
paper.
Preview window Displays an image of the print
results.
Advanced You can make more advanced
setups regarding the print
quality and paper size.
[Paper/Quality] tab
Item Explanation
Tray Selection Species the tray to feed the
paper.
Color Species color or
monochrome printing.
Advanced You can make more advanced
setups regarding the print
quality and paper size.
- 15 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Job Options] tab
Item Explanation
Quality Species the resolution
during printing.
Output Bin Species the paper output
bin.
Job Type Species the print format and
quantity to be printed.
Fit to Page Species when printing by
converting the paper size of
the document to be printed.
Watermarks Species when implementing
stamp printing.
Overlays Species when implementing
overlay printing.
Advanced You can make other advanced
print setups.
About Displays the printer driver
version information.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
[Color] tab
Item Explanation
Color Mode Species color matching, etc.,
in color mode.
Toner Saving Species the print density
when economizing on toner.
Spot Color* Species when implementing
Spot Color printing.
Advanced You can make other advanced
print setups.
Color Swatch Starts the color swatch utility.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
*: "Spot Color" is a function for model C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only. For details, see the
"Separate Volume Spot Color Guide".
- 16 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Windows PCL printer driver
functions
[Setup] Tab
Item Explanation
Size Species the paper size.
Source Species the tray to feed the
paper.
Type Species the paper type.
Weight Species the paper thickness.
Finishing Mode Species multi-page printing,
booklets, and poster printing,
etc.
2-Sided Printing Species to print on both
sides of the paper.
Orientation Species the print orientation.
Color Setting Species whether to print in
color or monochrome.
Toner saving Species the print density
when economizing on toner.
About Displays the printer driver
version information.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
[Job Options] Tab
Item Explanation
Quality Species the resolution
during printing.
Scale Species the rate of
enlargement and contraction
during printing.
Copies Species the quantity to be
printed.
Job Type Species the print format.
Output Bin Species the paper output
bin.
Advanced You can make several other
print setups.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
[Extend] Tab
Item Explanation
Watermarks Species when implementing
stamp printing.
Overlays Species when implementing
overlay printing.
Fonts Sets the TrueType fonts and
printer fonts.
- 17 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Spot Color] Tab
z
In white mode
z
In clear mode
Item Explanation
Usage methods Species the range of Spot
Color printing.
Order of
superposition
Specify the order of color and
white layering and white size
adjustment when printing
the white under. (white mode
only).
Mirror Print Sets when to print by
reversing the horizontal
orientation so that the
document is as if reected in
a mirror.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
Memo
z
"Spot Color" is a function for model C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only. For details, see the
"Separate Volume Spot Color Guide".
Windows XPS printer driver
functions
[Setup] Tab
Item Explanation
Size Species the paper size.
Source Species the tray to feed the
paper.
Type Species the paper type.
Weight Species the paper thickness.
Paper Feed
Options
You can set paper feed such
as changing the paper size
and tray switching, etc.
Finishing Mode Species multi-page printing,
booklets, and poster printing,
etc.
Orientation Species the print orientation.
2-Sided Printing
(Duplex)
Species to print on both
sides of the paper.
Driver Settings Specied when saving the
details set in the tab, and
when printing using these
saved settings.
About Displays the printer driver
version information.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
- 18 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Job Options] tab
Item Explanation
Print Quality Species the resolution
during printing.
Skip blank
pages
Prints excluding blank pages.
Job Settings Species the quantity to be
printed, etc.
Scale Species the rate of
enlargement and contraction
during printing.
Output Bin
Species the paper output bin.
Advanced You can make other advanced
print setups.
Watermarks Species when implementing
stamp printing.
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
[Color] tab
Item Explanation
Color Mode
Species the color print method.
Spot Color* Species when implementing
Spot Color printing.
Item Explanation
Default Restores the tab settings to
the default settings.
*: "Spot Color" is a function for model C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only. For details, see the
"Separate Volume Spot Color Guide".
Mac OS X PS printer driver
functions
[Print Options] panel
Item Explanation
Print Options Sets various functions.
Setup Items Species the setup items
conforming to the print setup.
[TextEdit] panel
Item Explanation
Printing header
and footer
Enable to print page numbers,
dates, and text titles, etc.
Rewrap
contents to t
page
Enable to print by aligning
to the text wrapping method
durign editing.
- 19 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Layout] Panel
Item Explanation
Pages per Sheet Selects the number of pages
to be printed on 1 sheet of
paper.
Layout Direction Species the layout when
printing multiple pages on a
single sheet of paper.
Border Species the boundary line
type.
Two-Sided Species to use 2-sided
printing.
Reverse page
orientation
Enable to print by reversing
the page orientation.
Flip horizontally Enable to print by reversing
left and right.
[Color Matching] panel
Item Explanation
ColorSync Species the ColorSync
function.
In printer Implements printer color
matching.
Prole Species the prole.
[Paper Handling] panel
Item Explanation
Pages to Print Species the pages to be
printed.
Page Order Species the order of the
pages to be printed.
Scale to t
Paper size
Prints by aligning to the paper
size. Some items may not be
printed correctly depending
on the setup.
Destination
Paper Size
Species to print by scaling to
match the size of the paper
to be output.
Scale down only Species to print by reducing
only to match the size of the
paper to be output.
[Paper Feed] panel
Item Explanation
All Pages From Species the tray for the
paper feed. The tray is
selected automatically when
[Auto Select] is specied.
First Page From Select to print from the tray
that species the header
page.
Remaining From Prints from the tray that
species the remaining
pages.
- 20 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Cover Page] panel
Item Explanation
Print Cover
Page
Species cover printing.
Cover Page
Type
Species the text during
printing.
Billing Info This function cannot be used.
[Spot Color] panel
z
In white mode
z
In clear mode
Item Explanation
Usage Methods Species the range of Spot
Color printing.
Order of
superposition
Specify the order of color and
white layering and white size
adjustment when printing
the white under. (white mode
only).
Mirror Print Sets when to print by
reversing the horizontal
orientation so that the
document is as if reected in
a mirror.
Memo
z
"Spot Color" is a function for model C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only. For details, see the
"Separate Volume Spot Color Guide".
- 21 -
Printer driver functions table
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
[Color] panel
Item Explanation
Grayscale Species to use monochrome
printing.
Color Species alignment to color
mode when printing in color.
[Print Options] panel
Item Explanation
Print Options Species alignment to the
items that have been set such
as print quality, paper type,
etc.
Items Setup Species the setup items
conforming to the print setup
tab.
Memo
z
This section uses [MemoPad] for its Windows explanations,
and [TextEditor] for its Mac OS X explanations.
Descriptions may differ depending on the applications and
printer drivers used.
Reference
z
For detailed explanations of the printer driver setup items,
see the printer driver "Online Help".
- 22 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Printing on various papers
Printing on envelopes
Memo
z
For the types of envelopes that can be used, see “Usable
Paper Types” in “Basic”.
z
For the Multi-Purpose Tray preparations, see "Setting
paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray" in "Basic".
z
You can print by manually feeding one page at a time from
the Multi-Purpose Tray. For details, see “Printing single
sheets manually” (P.87).
Note
z
2-sided printing and printing from paper trays are disabled
for envelopes.
z
Print speed will be slowed.
z
Setting the paper orientation
Set the print surface face-up.
Set as a diagram to print the addressee.
(Kakugata 3 gou/
6 gou/8 gou
Nagagata 3 gou/
4 gou/40 gou)
(Yougata 0 gou/2
gou/4 gou
Yougata Long 3 gou)
Com-6 3/4, Com-9, Com-10
DL, C4, C5 Monarch,
A2 Envelope,
A6 Envelope, A7 Envelope
(Kakugata
2 gou)
Before setting
1
Check that the envelope is not bent or
swollen.
2
If the envelope is bent, hold the
diagonally-opposite edges of the
envelope and slowly bend to straighten
the envelope.
3
If there is a difference in the thickness
on the left and right when the envelopes
are stacked, use a rod to make the
thickness universal.
z
Cross-sectional diagram of an envelope
Memo
z
If the front edge of the envelope is bent or
swollen, extend the envelope out at as shown
in the diagram below.
- 23 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing on standard size
envelopes
1
Setting envelopes in the Multi-Purpose
Tray.
2
Open the face-up stacker ( ) on the
left side of the machine.
3
Open the paper supporter ( ) as
shown in the following gure.
4
Rotate the auxiliary supporter ( ) in
the arrow direction to the lock position.
5
Set the paper size using the control
panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press [9], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
(3)
Select the envelope type, and
press the [OK] button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected envelope, and
press the [BACK] button.
(5)
Select [Media Weight], and press
the [OK] button.
- 24 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(6)
Select a suitable media weight, and
press the [OK] button. Check that
is displayed to the left of the
selected media weight.
Use Online button to return...
Paper Size
Media Type
Media Weight
Tray Usage
MPTray Config
Use Online button to return...
Auto
Ultra Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Heavy
Media Weight 1/2 Page
Light
Memo
z
If you want to print on a thin envelope of 24 lb, the
[Light] setting may improve the printing result.
(7)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
6
Open the le to be printed.
7
Select [Paper Size], [Paper Source],
and [Output Bin] in the printer drivers
to print.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Nagagata
*
(where
*
is the
envelope type)] in [Size], and [Portrait]
or [Landscape] in [Orientation], and
click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Click [Advanced] in the [Paper/Quality]
tab.
6
Select the envelope type in [Paper Size]
in the "Advanced Options" screen, and
click [OK].
- 25 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] in [Paper
Source].
8
Select [Stacker (Face-up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
9
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Nagagata
*
(where
*
is the
envelope type)] in [Size], and [Portrait]
or [Landscape] in [Orientation], and
click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the envelope type in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
6
Select [Multipurpose Tray] in [Source].
- 26 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Select [Stacker (Face UP)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
8
Click either [OK] or [Print] in the "Print"
screen to print.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Nagagata
*
(where
*
is the
envelope type)] in [Size], and [Portrait]
or [Landscape] in [Orientation], and
click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the envelope type in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
- 27 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
6
Select [Multipurpose Tray] in [Source].
7
Select [Printer (Face Up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
8
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the printer model name in
[Format For], and select [Envelope
*
(where
*
is the envelope type)] in
[Paper Size], and a suitable orientation
in [Orientation], and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Check that the printer model name is
selected in [Printer].
5
Select the envelope type in [Paper
Size].
6
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] in [Paper
Feed].
- 28 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Click the [Paper] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and select [Stacker
(Face-up)] from [Output Bin].
8
Click [Print] to print.
Printing on irregular size
envelopes
1
Setting envelopes in the Multi-Purpose
Tray.
2
Open the face-up stacker.
Set the print surface face-up to output.
Face-up stacker
3
Set the paper size, paper type, and
paper weight using the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press [9], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
- 29 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(3)
Select [Custom], and press the
[OK] button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of [Custom], and press the
[BACK] button.
(5)
Select [X Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(6)
Press the scroll buttons or
to select a suitable size, and then
press the [OK] button.
(7)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected size, and press
the [BACK] button.
(8)
Select [Y Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(9)
Press the scroll buttons or
to select a suitable size, and then
press the [OK] button.
(10)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected size, and press
the [BACK] button.
(11)
Select [Media Type], and press the
[OK] button.
(12)
Select [Envelope], and press the
[OK] button.
(13)
Check that is displayed to the
left of [Envelope], and press the
[BACK] button.
(14)
Select [Media Weight], and press
the [OK] button.
- 30 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(15)
Select a suitable paper weight, and
press the [OK] button. Check that
is displayed to the left of the
selected paper weight.
Memo
z
If you want to print on a thin envelope of 24 lb, the
[Light] setting may improve the printing result.
(16)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
4
Open the le to be printed.
5
Select [Paper Size], [Paper Source],
and [Output Bin] in the printer drivers
to print.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the paper size in [Size] and a
suitable orientation in [Orientation],
and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Click [Advanced] in the [Paper/Quality]
tab.
6
Select the paper size in [Paper Size] in
the "Advanced Options" screen.
- 31 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] in [Paper
Source].
8
Select [Stacker (Face-up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
9
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the paper size in [Size] and a
suitable orientation in [Orientation],
and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the paper size in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
6
Select [Multipurpose Tray] in [Source].
- 32 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Select [Stacker (Face Up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab.
8
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Register the paper name and paper size
for irregular size envelopes.
(1)
Click [Start], and then select
[Devices and Printers].
(2)
Select [OKI (product name)(XPS)],
and select [Print Server Properties]
in the tool bar.
(3)
Enable the [Create a new form]
check box in the [Forms] tab.
(4)
Enter the name of the irregular size
envelope in [Form name].
(5)
Enter the [Width] and [Height]
values.
(6)
Click [Save Form].
(7)
Click [Close].
- 33 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
2
Select the [Size], [Source], and [Output
Bin] for the registered irregular size
envelope to print.
(1)
Select [Page Setup] in the [File]
menu.
(2)
Select the name of the envelope
registered in [Size] and a suitable
orientation in [Orientation], and
click [OK].
(3)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(4)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(5)
Select the envelope name in [Size]
in the [Setup] tab.
(6)
Select [Multipurpose Tray] in
[Source].
(7)
Select [Printer (Face Up)] in
[Output Bin] in the [Job Options]
tab, and click [OK].
(8)
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
- 34 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the printer model name in
[Format For], and select the paper
size in [Paper Size], and a suitable
orientation in [Orientation], and click
[OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Check that the printer model name is
selected in [Printer].
5
Select the paper size in [Paper Size].
6
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] in [Paper
Feed].
7
Click the [Paper] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and select [Stacker
(Face-up)] from [Output Bin].
8
Click [Print] to print.
- 35 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing on glossy paper
Memo
z
For the Multi-Purpose Tray preparations, see "Setting
paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray" in "Basic".
1
Set the glossy paper.
Memo
z
You can print by manually feeding one page at a
time from the Multi-Purpose Tray. For details, see
“Printing single sheets manually” (P.87).
Setting in the Multi-Purpose Tray
ABC
Setting the paper
orientation
Setting in the paper tray
Setting the paper
orientation
2
If outputting to the face-up stacker,
open the face-up stacker.
Set the print surface face-up to output.
Memo
z
You can output to the face-down stacker.
Face-up stacker
3
Set the paper size and paper type using
the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
- 36 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(2)
Enter a number according to the
paper to be used.
z
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray
Press [9], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
z
Using tray 1
Press [1], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
(3)
Select the paper size, and press
the [OK] button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected paper size, and
press the [BACK] button.
(5)
Select [Media Type], and press the
[OK] button.
(6)
Select [Glossy], and press the [OK]
button. Check that
is displayed
to the left of [Glossy].
(7)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
4
Open the le to be printed.
5
Select [Size], [Source], and [Output
Bin] in the printer drivers to print.
- 37 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the paper size in [Size] and a
suitable orientation in [Orientation],
and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Click [Advanced] in the [Paper/Quality]
tab.
6
Select the paper size in [Paper Size] in
the "Advanced Options" screen.
7
Select the paper tray in [Paper Source].
8
Select [Glossy] in [Media].
9
Select the output bin using [Output Bin]
in the [Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
10
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to print.
- 38 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the paper size in [Size] and a
suitable orientation in [Orientation],
and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the paper size in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
6
Select the paper tray in [Source].
7
Select [Glossy] in [Type].
8
Select the output bin using [Output Bin]
in the [Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
9
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
- 39 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the paper size in [Size] and a
suitable orientation in [Orientation],
and click [OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the paper size in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
6
Select the paper tray in [Source].
7
Select [Glossy] in [Type].
- 40 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
8
Select the output bin using [Output Bin]
in the [Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
9
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to print.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the printer model name in
[Format For], and select the paper
size in [Paper Size], and a suitable
orientation in [Orientation], and click
[OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Check that the printer model name is
selected in [Printer].
5
Select the paper size in [Paper Size].
6
Select the paper tray in the [Paper
Feed] panel.
- 41 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Click [Feed] in the [Print Options]
panel, and select [Transparency] from
[Media Type].
8
Click the [Paper] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and select the output
bin from [Output Bin].
9
Click [Print] to print.
Printing on labels and
transparencies
Memo
z
For the types of labels and transparencies that can be
used, see "Usable Paper Types" in "Basic".
z
For the Multi-Purpose Tray preparations, see "Setting
paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray" in "Basic".
1
Set the paper.
Labels and transparencies are printed from
the Multi-Purpose Tray or Tray 1.
Memo
z
You can print by manually feeding one page at a
time from the Multi-Purpose Tray. For details, see
“Printing single sheets manually” (P.87).
Note
z
Printing from trays 2 to 5 and 2-sided printing are
disabled for labels and transparencies.
z
Print speed will be slowed.
z
Transparency is not available to clear toner printing.
Setting in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Set the print surface face-up.
ABC
Setting the paper
orientation
Setting in tray 1
Set the print surface face-down.
Setting the paper
orientation
- 42 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
2
Open the face-up stacker.
Output labels and transparencies to the
face-up stacker.
Face-up stacker
3
Set the paper weight, paper size, and
paper type using the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Enter a number according to the
paper to be used.
z
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray
Press [9], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
z
Using tray 1
Press [1], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
(3)
Select [A4 ], and press the [OK]
button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of [A4
], and press the [BACK]
button.
(5)
Select [Media Type], and press the
[OK] button.
- 43 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(6)
Select [Labels] or [Transparency],
and press the [OK] button. Check
that
is displayed to the left of
[Labels] or [Transparency], and
press the [BACK] button.
(7)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
4
Open the le to be printed.
5
Select [Size], [Source], and [Output
Bin] in the printer drivers to print.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Portrait] or [Landscape] in
[Orientation], and click the [OK] button.
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Click [Advanced] in the [Paper/Quality]
tab.
6
Select the paper size in [Paper Size] in
the "Advanced Options" screen.
- 44 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Select [Labels] or [Transparency] in
[Media]. Select the paper tray in [Paper
Source].
8
Select [Stacker (Face-up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
9
Click [Print] in the "Print" screen to
print.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Portrait] or [Landscape] in
[Orientation], and click the [OK] button.
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the paper size in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
- 45 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
6
Select [Labels] or [Transparency]
in [Type]. Select the paper tray in
[Source].
7
Select [Stacker (Face Up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
8
Click either [OK] or [Print] in the "Print"
screen to print.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Portrait] or [Landscape] in
[Orientation], and click the [OK] button.
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
5
Select the paper size in [Size] in the
[Setup] tab.
- 46 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
6
Select [Labels] or [Transparency]
in [Type]. Select the paper tray in
[Source].
7
Select [Printer (Face Up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab, and click
[OK].
8
Click [Print] in the [Print] screen to
print.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
2
Select the printer model name in
[Format For], and select the paper
size in [Paper Size], and a suitable
orientation in [Orientation], and click
[OK].
3
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
4
Check that the printer model name is
selected in [Printer].
5
Select the paper size in [Paper Size].
6
Select the paper tray in the [Paper
Feed] panel.
- 47 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Click the [Paper] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and select [Stacker
(Face-up)] from [Output Bin].
8
Click [Print] to print.
Printing on user-selected
paper sizes (custom pages
and lengthy printing)
Register the desired paper size in the printer
driver, and specify when printing.
[Sizes that can be fed from the Multi-
Purpose Tray (Settable custom sizes)]
Width: 64 to 330mm
Length: 89 to 1321mm
[Sizes
that
can be fed from the Multi-
Purpose Tray]
Trays 1/2/3/4/5
Width: 99 to 330mm
Length: 147 to 457mm
[Sizes where 2-sided printing is possible]
Width: 99 to 330mm
Length: 147 to 483mm
Note
z
If printing smaller paper than width 99mm and length
147mm, feed from the Multi-Purpose Tray and output to
the face-up stacker.
z
Set the paper size to portrait length, and set in the device.
z
Not usable with some applications.
z
If feeding from the Multi-Purpose Tray, support the paper
manually for paper lengths that are not fully supported by
the paper supporter.
z
If feeding from the paper trays (tray 1, (optional)
trays 2 to 5), press the scroll buttons
or on
the device control panel, and select [Menu]>[Tray
Conguration]>[Set Tray 1]>[Paper Size]>[Custom].
z
If there is no paper in the tray, setting the function to
switch automatically to a tray in which paper of the same
size has been set, the default settings will be enabled
(i.e., the check box will be enabled). If the paper runs out
during printing, paper will feed from another tray. Disable
(i.e., uncheck) the check box when printing custom size
paper from a designated tray only.
- 48 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
1
Set the paper.
Memo
z
You can print by manually feeding one page at a
time from the Multi-Purpose Tray. For details, see
“Printing single sheets manually” (P.87).
Setting in the Multi-Purpose Tray
ABC
Setting the paper
orientation
Setting in the paper tray
Setting the paper
orientation
2
If outputting to the face-up stacker,
open the face-up stacker.
Set the print surface face-up to output.
Memo
z
You can output to the face-down stacker.
Face-up stacker
3
Set the paper size and paper type using
the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Enter a number according to the
paper to be used.
z
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray
Press [9], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
z
Using tray 1
Press [1], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
(3)
Select [Custom], and press the
[OK] button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of [Custom], and press the
[BACK] button.
- 49 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(5)
Select [X Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(6)
Press the scroll buttons or
to select a suitable size, and then
press the [OK] button.
(7)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected size, and press
the [BACK] button.
(8)
Select [Y Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(9)
Press the scroll buttons or
to select a suitable size, and then
press the [OK] button.
(10)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected size, and press
the [BACK] button.
(11)
Set the paper type and paper
weight as necessary.
(12)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
4
Register the desired paper size in the
printer drivers to print.
- 50 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name) (PS)]
icon, and select [Printing Preferences]>[OKI
(product name) (PS)].
3
Click [Advanced] in the [Layout] tab.
4
Select [PostScript Custom Page Size] in
[Paper Size].
5
Enter the [Width] and [Height] in
the "PostScript Custom Page Size
Denition" screen.
Note
z
"Offsets Relative to Paper Feed Direction" cannot be set.
6
Click [OK] until the "Printing
Preferences" screen closes.
7
Open the le to be printed.
8
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
9
Specify the registered paper size to print.
Memo
z
If printing is incorrect using large size paper from the PS
printer drivers, you can correct the printing by setting
"
Normal
"
in [Quality].
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PCL6)] icon, and select [Printing
Preferences]>[OKI (product name)
(PCL6)].
3
Click [Paper Feed Options] in the
[Setup] tab.
4
Click [Custom Size] in the [Paper Feed
Options] screen.
5
Enter [Name], [Width], and [Length] in
the [Custom Size] screen.
- 51 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
6
Click [Add].
The created paper will be displayed at the
bottom of the [Size] list in the [Setup] tab.
32 types max. can be dened.
7
Click [OK] until the "Printing
Preferences" screen closes.
8
Open the le to be printed.
9
Specify the registered paper size to
print.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Select [OKI (product name)(XPS)], and
select "Print Server Properties" in the
tool bar.
3
Enable the [Create a new form] check
box in the [Forms] tab.
4
Enter the name and size.
(1)
Enter the new size name in [Form
name].
(2)
Enter the [Width] and [Height]
values.
5
Click [Save Form].
6
Click [Close].
7
Open the le to be printed.
8
Specify the registered paper size to
print.
- 52 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
Note
z
Custom sizes exceeding the printable range can be
entered using Mac OS X, but printing will be incorrect. Set
within the correct range.
z
If a custom paper size with the same paper size as
registered in the OS is specied, the paper may be
handled as regular paper.
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Manage Custom Sizes] in [Paper
Size].
4
Click [+] in the "Custom Paper Sizes"
screen. Double-click [Untitled], and enter
a name in [Custom Paper Sizes]. Enter the
[Width] and [Height] page sizes.
5
Click [OK].
The created paper will be displayed at the
bottom of the [Paper Size] list in the [Page
Properties] panel.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using custom media
This setting is used in the following cases:
z
If a lateral stripe stands out in Heavy media, it
may be improved by setting [Custom media].
In this case, print speed will be slower.
z
When you want to print on OKI TRANSPARENCY
FILM.
1
Set the paper size and paper type using
the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The number input screen appears.
(2)
Input the number depending on
the paper tray being used.
z
For the multi-purpose tray
Press [9] and [0], and press the
[OK] button.
z
For Tray1
Press [1] and [0], and press the
[OK] button.
- 53 -
Printing on various papers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(3)
Select the paper size, and press
the [OK] button.
(4)
Check that is displayed to the
left of the selected paper size, and
press the [BACK] button.
(5)
Select [Media Type], and press the
[OK] button.
(6)
Select [HQFORUH1] - [HQFORUH5]
or [OKITRANSFILM], and press the
[OK] button.
Check that
is displayed to the
left of the selected [HQFORUH].
Use Online button to return...
Paper Size
Media Type
Media Weight
Tray Usage
MPTray Config
Use Online button to return...
Rough
Postcard
Envelope
HQFORUH1
Media Type 2/2 Page
Glossy
Card Stock
(7)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
* In the default factory settings, paper types are set for [HQFORUH1] - [HQFORUH5] as shown in the following table.
Paper Type Name Media Type Media Weight
HQ_FOR_UH1 Plain Ultra Heavy1
HQ_FOR_UH2 Plain Ultra Heavy2
HQ_FOR_UH3 Plain Ultra Heavy3
HQ_FOR_UH4 Plain Ultra Heavy4
HQ_FOR_UH5 Plain Ultra Heavy5
OKITRANSFILM OKI Special setting
- 54 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Economy printing
Printing multiple pages
on a single sheet (multi-
page printing)
You can print by reducing data for multiple pages
on a single sheet.
1
1 2
3 4
2
3
4
Note
z
This function reduces the data to print, so the center of
the paper may not be accurately aligned.
z
Bind width can also be set using Windows PCL/XPS printer
drivers.
z
Not usable with some applications.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the number of pages to pr
printed on a single page from [Pages
per Sheet] in the [Layout] tab.
Memo
z
If using Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008, make
sure to set [Draw Borders] as necessary. Further, you can
also change the page distribution using [Advanced]>[Page
Layout per Sheet].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 55 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer
drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [n-up] (where n is the number
of pages to be printed on 1 sheet) in
[Finishing Mode] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Options], and set [Page Borders],
[Page layout], and [Bind Margin] as
necessary. The bind width can be set
from 0 to 30mm left and right.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [n-up] (where n is the number
of pages to be printed on 1 sheet) in
[Finishing Mode] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Options], and set [Page Borders],
[Page layout], and [Bind Margin] as
necessary. The bind width can be set
from 0 to 30mm left and right.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 56 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Pages per Sheet], [Layout
Direction], and [Border] in the [Layout]
panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
2-Sided Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper.
1 1
2
2
For the types of paper, thicknesses, and sizes
that can be used in 2-sided printing, see "Usable
paper types" in "Basic".
For the range of widths and lengths of custom
sizes that can be used in 2-sided printing, see
“Printing on user-selected paper sizes (custom
pages and lengthy printing)” (P.47).
Note
z
Not usable with some applications.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Flip on Long Edge] or [Flip on
Short Edge] in [2-Sided Printing] in the
[Layout] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 57 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge] in
[2-Sided Printing] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge] in
[2-Sided Printing] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 58 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-
Edge binding] in [Two-Sided] in the
[Layout] tab.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Test printing with toner economy
(toner economy mode)
You can print by economizing the toner
consumption amount by reducing the page print
density. Separately set whether to enable or
disable toner economy mode over 100% black.
Memo
z
You can suppress the amount of toner used by reducing
the toner density by selecting one of the following four
patterns as necessary.
Printer setup: Follows the device setup.
OFF: Prints using regular density without economizing
the toner.
Save Level Low: Prints using medium light toner.
Save Level Middle: Prints using light toner.
Save Level High: Prints using considerably light toner.
z
[Toner Save] is enabled only if the print quality is specied
as [Normal].
Note
z
Toner save mode is not compatible with Spot Color
printing.
- 59 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the toner save amount from
[Toner Saving] in the [Color] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the toner save amount from
[Toner saving] in [Setup] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 60 -
Economy printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the toner save amount from
[Toner Saving] in [Job Options] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Quality 2] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and select the toner
save amount from [Toner Saving].
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 61 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Changing sizes to print
Enlarging/reducing pages
You can print on different paper sizes without
changing the print data.
A4
A6
Note
z
Not normally operable with some applications.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Paper/Quality]
tab.
5
Select the paper size to be edited in
[Paper Size].
6
Enable the [Resize document to t
printer page] check box in the [Job
Options] tab, and select the paper size
to be printed.
7
Printing will be implemented.
- 62 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the paper size to be edited in
[Size] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Enable the [Resize document to t
printer page] check box, and select the
paper size to be printed.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the paper size to be edited in
[Size] for [Media] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Paper Feed Options].
6
Enable the [Resize document to t printer
page] check box, and select the paper size
to be printed.
7
Printing will be implemented.
- 63 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Page Setup] in the [File] menu.
3
Select the printer model name in
[Format For], and select the paper size
to be edited in [Paper Size], and click
[OK].
4
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
5
Enable the [Scale to t paper size]
in the [Paper Handling] panel, and
select the paper size to be edited using
"Destination Paper Size".
6
Printing will be implemented.
Enlarging and printing multiple
sheets (poster printing)
You can enlarge the source data and print parts
to multiple sheets of paper.
1 2
3 4
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
z
Posters cannot be printed if printing using encrypted
secure print functions from the client after creating the
printer drivers using a shared network.
z
If [Poster Print] is not operating, right-click the [OKI
(printer name) (PCL6)] in the [Devices and Printers]
folder, and select [Preferences]>[Advanced]>[Print
Processor]>[OKX04ZPP].
- 64 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Poster Print] in [Finishing Mode]
in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Options], and set [Enlarge],
[Add Registrationg Marks], and [Add
Overlap] as necessary.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Poster Print] in [Finishing Mode]
in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Options], and set [Enlarge], [Add
Crop Marks], and [Add Overlap] as
necessary.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 65 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Sorting pages to print
pamphlets (booklets)
You can create pamphlet-like booklets.
12
4
1
2
3
8
10
5
3
12
7
9
11
1
6
4
2
12
1
3
5
7
9
11
Back
Fold in
two as is
Back
Back
Note
z
Not normally operable with some applications.
z
Cannot be used with Mac OS X printer drivers.
z
Watermarks cannot be printed correctly when using
[Pamphlet] printing.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
Note
z
If creating PostScript data using the application itself,
pamphlets may not be specied correctly. Whether or not
this method can be avoided depends on the publication.
Check the manual for the application used. For example,
with Adobe Acrobat Professional or Adobe Reader, enable
the "Print as image" check box in the advanced setup
for the print dialog box to implement pamphlet printing
normally.
z
If [Pamphlets] is not printing, right-click the [OKI (printer
name) (PS)] in the [Devices and Printers] folder, and
enable [Enable advanced print functions] in [Printer
Properties]>[Job Options] tab.
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Booklet] in the [Layout] tab.
5
If using Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008, make sure to set "Draw
Borders" as necessary.
6
Click [Advanced], and select the paper
size to be actually used in [Paper Size].
7
Printing will be implemented.
Memo
z
E.g.: Creating A5 size pamphlets using A4 size paper
Select [A4] in [Paper Size] in [Job Options].
z
If using Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008, and if
creating pamphlets folded on the right (i.e., pamphlets
with the binding on the right when the pages are face-up),
select [Right] in [Pamphlet Binding] in [Job Options].
- 66 -
Changing sizes to print
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
Note
z
Pamphlets cannot be printed if printing using encrypted
secure print functions from the client after creating the
printer drivers using a shared network.
z
If [Booklet] cannot be printed, right-click the [OKI
(printer name) (PCL6)] in the [Devices and Printers]
folder, and select [Preferences]>[Advanced]>[Print
Processor]>[OKX04ZPP].
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Booklet] in [Finishing Mode] in the
[Setup] tab, and click [Options].
5
Set [Signature], [2 pages], [Right to
Left], and [Bind Margin] as necessary in
"Booklet".
z
Signature
This is the page unit for booklets.
z
Right to Left
Prints so that the pamphlet opens on the right.
Memo
z
E.g.: If creating A5 size booklets using A4 size paper,
select [A4] in [Paper Size] in the [Setup] tab.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Booklet] in [Finishing Mode] in
the [Setup] tab, and click [Options].
5
Set [Signature], [2 pages], [Right
to Left], and [Bind Margin], etc. as
necessary in "Booklet".
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 67 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Clean printing
Changing print quality
(resolution)
Set [Quality] by aligning to the environment
used.
Memo
z
If printing is incorrect using large size paper from the PS
printer drivers, you can correct the printing by setting
"
Normal
"
in [Quality].
z
Select [ProQ / High Quality] to print using the highest
printer quality.
Select [Normal (600x600 dpi)] to print at low resolution.
This mode prioritizes print speed.
[Fine/Detail(1200x1200 dpi)] is an intermediate mode
between [ProQ / High Quality] and [Normal (600x600 dpi)].
z
By selecting [Optimize color thin line], characters and/or
lines with color will be printed sharply.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Change [Quality] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Change [Quality] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 68 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Change [Print Quality] in the [Job
Options] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Quality 1] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and change [Quality].
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 69 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing sharper photos
(photo mode)
You can print more naturally vividly images such
as photos, etc.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PS, Windows XPS, and Mac
OS X printer drivers.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Photo Enhance] in [Quality] in
the [Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Printign text and lines
sharply
Print colored text and lines sharply.
Memo
z
Not suitable for photo printing.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Optimize color thin line] in the
[Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 70 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the [Optimize color thin line] in
the [Job Options] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Fine Color Thin Line] in the [Job
Options] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 71 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Quality 1] in the [Print Options]
panel, and enable the [Optimize color
thin line] check box.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Compensating ne lines
You can prevent misaligned lines being printed
when ultra-ne lines are specied from the
application. This function is normally ON.
Memo
z
Depending on the application, bar code and other intervals
will narrow. In this case, turn OFF the function.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Enable the [Adjust ultra ne lines]
check box, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 72 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Select [Adjust ultra ne lines], and then
select [On] in [Settings], and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Quality 1] in the [Print Options]
panel, and enable the [Adjust ultra ne
lines] check box.
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 73 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using printer fonts
You can print by replacing the TrueType fonts
with the fonts stored in the device.
Note
z
The font replacement function stores the document
fonts, but font designs cannot be reproduced. If it is
necessary to print font designs accurately, disable the font
replacement function.
z
Some of the applications that use unique printer drivers
cannot use the font replacement function easily.
z
If using Windows PS printer drivers, PC administrator
privileges are required.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PS)] icon, and select [Printer
Properties].
3
Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Specify the printer font to be used
instead of TrueType fonts in [Font
Substitution Table].
To specify a font, click the TrueType font,
and select the replacement printer font
from the drop-down list.
5
Click [OK].
6
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
7
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
8
Click [Advanced] in the [Layout] tab.
9
Select [Substitute with Device Font] in
[TrueType Font].
10
Printing will be implemented.
- 74 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Fonts] in the [Extend] tab.
5
Enable the [Font Substitution] check
box in the [Font] screen.
6
Specify the printer font to replace the
TrueType font in [Font Substitution
Table].
7
Printing will be implemented.
- 75 -
Clean printing
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using PC fonts
You can output TrueType fonts to the screen
display as is.
Note
z
Print time may be longer.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Layout] tab.
5
Select [Download as Softfont] in
[TrueType Font].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Font] in the [Extend] tab.
5
Disable the [Font Substitution] check
box in the [Font] screen.
z
Download as outline font
Creates font images using the printer.
z
Download as bitmap font
Creates font images using the printer
drivers.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 76 -
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
Entering passwords to
print (Secure Print)
You can save print jobs to the device HDD, and
enter a password in the control panel to print.
To use this function, it is necessary to mount the
(optional) HDD to the device.
Note
z
If there is insufcient space on the option built-in
HDD storing the print jobs, "File system is full" will be
displayed, and printing will be disabled.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
1
Open the le to be printed, and specify
[Secure Print].
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
If using PS printer drivers, select
[Secure Print] in [Job Type] in the
[Job Options] tab.
If using PCL printer drivers, select
[Secure Print] in [Job Type] in the
[Job Options] tab.
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 PCL printer driver screen)
- 77 -
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(5)
Input the "Job Name" and "Job
Password" in the
"
JOB PIN
"
screen,
and click [OK].
z
Request Job Name for each print job
When implementing printing, the
screen to enter the job name will be
displayed.
z
Job Password
Set using 4-digit gures.
z
Job Name
Set using up to 16 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
If [Request Job Name for each print
job] is enabled, enter the "Job Name"
in the "Enter Job Name" screen, and
click [OK].
Note
z
If the user who started the secure print job has
forgotten that the job exists, or has forgotten the
password, the job will remain stored on the device
HDD. Use the Conguration Tool to delete secure
print jobs that have been left on the HDD. For
details, see “Deleting unnecessary jobs from the
HDD” (P.186).
2
Enter the password from the control
panel to print.
(1)
Press the scroll button or .
(2)
Select [Print Secure Job], and
press the [OK] button.
(3)
Select [Stored Job], and press the
[OK] button.
(4)
Use the 10-key pad to enter the
4-digit password for the job to be
printed to start the search.
Memo
z
If the password is entered incorrectly, press the
[BACK] button, and reset.
z
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the search.
- 78 -
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(5)
Select [Print], and press the [OK]
button.
Print Secure Job
Encrypted Job
Stored Job
Use
Online
button
to
return
to
standby
screen
Stored Job 1/1 Page
Print
Memo
z
Select [Delete], and press the [OK] button to
delete a job.
(6)
Use 10-key pad or the scroll
buttons
or to enter the print
quantity, and press the [OK]
button.
Reference
z
You can use the Conguration Tool to delete the secure
print job. For details, see “Deleting unnecessary jobs from
the HDD” (P.186).
Printing secret text
(encrypted secure print)
The print job is encrypted before being sent
to the device. Consequently, leaks regarding
the print details can still be prevented even if
print data is stolen from the HDD or the device
communications process. Further, to strengthen
security even more, print jobs spooled on the
HDD are either printed, or deleted after a xed
period of time has elapsed.
To print, it is necessary to enter the password
using the control panel, so theft of the printed
matter can also be prevented.
To use this function, it is necessary to mount the
(optional) HDD to the device.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
z
If using Windows PCL printer drivers to create a print
server on a shared network, and printing uses encrypted
secure print from the client, printing posters and booklets
will be disabled.
z
If there is insufcient space on the built-in HDD storing
the print jobs, "File system is full" will be displayed, and
printing will be disabled.
z
If using Encrypted Secure Print, disable "Job Spool". For
details, see “Using the printer buffer” (P.106).
z
The [Print only encrypted secure print jobs] from the
[Device Settings] tab in Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows
7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server
2008 with Windows PS printer drivers will be disabled.
- 79 -
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
1
Open the le to be printed, and specify
[Encrypted Secure Print].
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
If using PS printer drivers, select
[Encrypted Secure Print] in [Job
Type] in the [Job Options] tab.
If using PCL printer drivers, select
[Encrypted Secure Print] in [Job
Type] in the [Job Options] tab.
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 PCL printer driver screen)
(5)
Input the "Password" in the
"
Secure
Print Setting
"
screen, and click [OK].
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
z
Password
Set using 4 to 12 alphanumeric
characters.
z
Always ask for password
When implementing printing, the
screen to enter the password will be
displayed.
Note
z
This check box is disabled in Windows 8.1/
Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows
Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008. Enter
the password in the "JOB PIN" screen displayed
when [JOB PIN] is clicked.
z
Keep print job for
Set the period in which the print job is
stored on the device HDD from 5 mins,
to 23 hours 59 mins. Print jobs that
exceed the storage period are deleted
from the HDD automatically.
z
Erase Options
Specify the method when deleting
print jobs from the HDD.
Easy method: Delete the print job from the le
system. This deletion method risks the print job
being recovered from the HDD, but it will delete
in the shortest time.
Overwrite using 0x00: After overwriting the
specied data once, the print job is deleted. This
is a safer method compared to easy deletion, but
there is a risk that print jobs will be recovered
using special methods.
Overwrite 3 times: Overwrites the print job
data 3 times before deleting. This is the safest
deletion method, but deletion takes time.
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
If [Always ask for password] is enabled, enter
the "Password" in the "Secure Print Setting"
screen, and click [OK].
- 80 -
Printing print results so that people cannot see them
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
2
Enter the password from the control
panel to print.
(1)
Press the scroll button or .
(2)
Select [Print Secure Job], and
press the [OK] button.
(3)
Select [Encrypted Job], and press
the [OK] button.
(4)
Enter the print job password using
either the 10-key pad or the input
screen, and click the [OK] button
to start the search.
Memo
z
If the password is entered incorrectly, press the
[BACK] button, and reset.
z
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the search.
(5)
Select [Print], and press the [OK]
button.
Print Secure Job
Encrypted Job
Stored Job
Use
Online
button
to
return
to
standby
screen
Encrypted Job 1/1 Page
Print
Memo
z
Select [Delete], and press the [OK] button to
delete a job.
z
All jobs that match the password will be printed
in the order they are received by the device.
Memo
z
After implementing Encrypted Secure Print, the les
used in printing are deleted using the specied deletion
method. While a le is being deleted, the message
"Deleting Encrypted Job
"
will be displayed.
z
If data is lost during transfer or data falsication is
detected, the message [To turn off the display, press OK]
will be displayed.
- 81 -
Correcting the Print Position on the Paper Using the Control Panel
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Correcting the Print Position on the Paper Using
the Control Panel
Correcting the print start
position
You can correct the print start position vertically
and horizontally on the paper for each tray.
Please refer to the following procedure.
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press the function number of the tray
you want to correct, and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
The corresponding function numbers for each tray are
listed below.
Target Tray Function No.
MPTray 220
Tray1 221
Tray2 222
Tray3 223
Tray4 224
Tray5 225
3
Press the scroll button or to select
the item to correct.
Memo
z
Only C941/ES9541/Pro9541 will be displayed for
[Overprint X Adjust] and [Overprint Y Adjust].
4
Press the [OK] button.
- 82 -
Correcting the Print Position on the Paper Using the Control Panel
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
5
Press the scroll button or to select
the adjustment amount, and press the
[OK] button. Check that
is displayed
to the left of the selected value.
6
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Note
z
Y describes the paper feed direction and X describes its
orthogonal position.
z
Correct with [+] to widen the blank space in the X
direction, and [+] to widen the blank space in the Y
direction.
z
Readjustment might be necessary depending on the usage
conditions (temperature and humidity/media type).
z
This function corrects the position and does not improve
the writing start position (±2mm).
- 83 -
Adjusting the Image Stretch (Print Length) Using the Control Panel
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Adjusting the Image Stretch (Print Length) Using
the Control Panel
Adjusting the stretch of
print results
You can adjust the stretch of print results on the
paper feed direction.
Please refer to the following procedure.
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press the function number of the tray
you want to adjust, and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
The corresponding function numbers for each tray are
listed below.
Tray Function No.
MPTray 220
Tray1 221
Tray2 222
Tray3 223
Tray4 224
Tray5 225
3
Press the scroll button or to select
[Y Scaling].
4
Press the [OK] button.
- 84 -
Adjusting the Image Stretch (Print Length) Using the Control Panel
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
5
Press the scroll button or to select
the adjustment amount, and press the
[OK] button. Check that
is displayed
to the left of the selected value.
6
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Note
z
Adjust with [+] to enlarge the print result on the feed
direction of the paper and [-] to reduce.
z
Refer to "Correcting the print start position" (P.81) for
correcting the print start position of the paper edge.
z
Readjustment might be necessary depending on the usage
conditions (temperature and humidity/media type).
z
This function adjusts the scale of image and does not
improve the image scale precision (±1mm/100mm).
z
Over-enlarging the print result may stain the back of the
paper.
- 85 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Advanced print functions
Setting the page order
Extracts in page order when printing documents
with multiple pages.
There are two methods.
Printing documents in page
order
The printed documents are output face-down.
1
Open the document to be printed.
2
Specify the face-down stacker as the
Output Bin to print.
Note
z
For paper weights with GSM 320 to 360g/m
2
(ream weight
275 to 310kg), custom size paper with a length less than
147mm, envelopes, labels, and transparencies, make sure
to open the face-up stacker and output the documents
face-up.
Face-up stacker
Face-down stacker
Printing documents in reverse
page order
The printed documents are output face-up.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PCL and Windows XPS
printer drivers.
1
Open the face-up stacker at the back of the device.
Face-up stacker
2
Open the paper supporter.
- 86 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
3
Rotate the auxiliary supporter in the
direction of the arrow into the lock position.
Supplementary
supporter
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Stacker (Face-up)] in [Output
Bin] in the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select [Front to Back] in [Page Order]
in the [Layout] tab.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Note
z
If the [Page Order] item is not displayed, right-click the
[OKI (printer name) (PS)] in the [Devices and Printers]
folder, and enable [Enable advanced printing features] in
[Printer Properties]>[Advanced] tab.
- 87 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Paper] button on the [Print
Options] panel.
4
Select [Stacker (Face-up)] in [Output
Bin].
5
Select [Reverse] in [Page Order] in the
[Paper Handling] panel.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Printing single sheets
manually
You can print single pages individually by setting
the paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray. A message
to set the paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray will be
displayed on the control panel screen for each
page to be printed. To continue printing, select
[Restart print].
1
Set the paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray.
2
Open the le to be printed.
3
Set the manual printing using the
printer drivers, and press the [OK]
button on the control panel to print.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
5
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from [Paper
Source].
6
Click [Advanced].
- 88 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
7
Click [Multipurpose tray is handled as
manual feed], and select [Yes] from the
drop-down list.
8
Click [OK].
9
Make other settings as necessary to
print.
10
When a message to set the paper in the
Multi-Purpose Tray is displayed in the
control panel LCD, set a single sheet,
and press the [OK] button.
When printing multiple-page
documents, the same message will be
displayed for each page.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Multipurpose Tray] from
[Source] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Paper Feed Options].
6
Enable [Use MP tray as manual feed]
in [Multi Purpose Tray Settings], click
[OK].
7
Make other settings as necessary to
print.
8
When a message to set the paper in the
Multi-Purpose Tray is displayed in the
control panel LCD, set a single sheet,
and press the [OK] button.
When printing multiple-page
documents, the same message will be
displayed for each page.
- 89 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Multipurpose Tray] from
[Source] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Click [Paper Feed Options].
6
Enable [Use MP tray as manual feed] in
[Multipurpose Tray Settings], click [OK].
7
Make other settings as necessary to print.
8
When a message to set the paper in the Multi-
Purpose Tray is displayed in the control panel LCD,
set a single sheet, and press the [OK] button.
When printing multiple-page documents, the
same message will be displayed for each page.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Open the [Paper Feed] panel, and select
[Multi-Purpose Tray] in [All Pages From].
4
Click the [Feed] button in the [Print Options]
panel, and enable [Multipurpose tray is
handled as manual feed].
5
Make other settings as necessary to print.
6
When a message to set the paper in the
Multi-Purpose Tray is displayed in the
control panel LCD, set a single sheet,
and press the [OK] button.
When printing multiple-page
documents, the same message will be
displayed for each page.
- 90 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Automatically selecting
trays
The tray matching the paper size set using the
printer drivers (tray 1, (optional) trays 2 to 5, or
Multi-Purpose Tray) will be selected automatically
for printing.
Note
z
Set the paper size and paper type for tray 1, (optional)
trays 2 to 5, and the Multi-Purpose Tray using the control
panel. For detailed, see "Setting paper" in "Basic".
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Automatically Select] in [Paper
Source] in the [Paper/Quality] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Auto] in [Source] in the [Setup]
tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 91 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Auto] in [Source] in the [Setup]
tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Auto Select] in [All Pages From]
in the [Paper Feed] panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 92 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing only covers from
a separate tray (cover
printing)
When printing multiple-page documents, you can
print just the 1st page from a separate tray. Use
to create covers by changing the paper color and
weight of the 1st page.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PS printer drivers.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Paper Feed Options] in the
[Setup] tab.
5
Enable the [Use different source for
rst page] in [Cover Printing], and
select the paper feed method for the
1st page from [Paper feed options].
Set the paper type and paper weight as
necessary, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Paper Feed Options] in the
[Setup] tab.
5
Enable the [Use different source for rst
page] in [Cover Printing], and select
the paper feed method for the 1st page
from [Paper feed options]. Set the
[Type] and [Weight] as necessary.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 93 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Enable the [First Page From] in the
[Paper Feed] panel, and select each
paper feed method from [First Page
From] and [Remaining From].
4
Printing will be implemented.
Stamping and printing
(watermarks)
The details to be printed from the application can
be independently printed overlaying [Samples],
[Condential], etc.
Samples
Note
z
Cannot be used with Mac OS X printer drivers.
z
Watermarks cannot be printed correctly when using
pamphlet printing.
Using Windows printer
drivers
Note
z
With PS printer drivers, the default settings print by
overlaying watermarks on the text and diagrams in
the document. To print watermarks under the text and
diagrams, enable the [Background] check box in the
[Watermarks] dialog box.
z
Enable the [Background] check box to not print
watermarks depending on the application. In this case,
disable the [background] check box.
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
- 94 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
4
If using PS or XPS printer drivers, click
[Watermarks] in the [Job Options] tab.
If using PCL printer drivers, select
[Watermarks] in [Extend] tab.
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 PCL printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 XPS printer driver screen)
5
Click [New].
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
6
Enter [Text] in the "Watermarks"
screen, and set another [Size].
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
7
Click [OK].
8
Printing will be implemented.
- 95 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Collate (sort printing)
You can store print jobs in the device memory
and collate the printing.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
3
1
1
2
Printing by specifying batches
Printing without specifying batches
x2
x2
Note
z
Not usable with some applications.
Using Windows printer drivers
Note
z
If using PS printer drivers, turn OFF the batch printing
function in the application.
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
If using PS or XPS printer drivers, enter the
print quantity in [Copies] in the [Job Options]
tab, and enable the [Collate] check box.
If using PCL printer drivers, enter the print
quantity in [Copies] in the [Job Options]
tab, and enable the [Collate] check box.
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 PCL printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 XPS printer driver screen)
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 96 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Disable [Collate pages] in the [Paper
Handling] panel or print dialog box, and
enter the print quantity in [Copies].
4
Click the [Paper] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and enable the [Collate]
check box.
Memo
z
If [Collate pages] is enabled in the [Print Handling]
panel, do not use the device memory when printing.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 97 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Outputting portrait and landscape alternately using
batch printing
When outputting for each batch, you can output the pages in portrait and landscape orientations
alternately.
As you can output portrait and landscape alternately, it is easy to arrange print jobs with multiple
pages.
1 2 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3rd 2nd 1st
Memo
z
To use the portrait and landscape output function, it is necessary to mount the (optional) HDD to the device.
z
Prepare the paper for portrait and landscape in the paper feed tray beforehand.
z
The usable paper sizes are described below.
A4Wide, A4, A5, B5, letter, 16K (184 x 260mm), 16K (195 x 270mm), 16K (197 x 273mm)
Note
z
Cannot be used with Mac OS X 10.4.11 or earlier printer drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Enter the print quantity in [Copies] in [Job
Options], and enable the [Collate] check box.
5
Enable the [Rotate Sort] check box.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Enter the print quantity in [Copies] in
the [Job Options] tab, and enable the
[Collate] check box.
5
Enable the [Rotate Sort] check box.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 98 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Enter the print quantity in [Copies] in
[Job Options], and enable the [Collate]
check box.
5
Enable the [Rotate Sort] check box.
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Enter the print quantity in the print
quantity, and then click the [Paper]
button in the [Print Options] panel, and
enable the [Collate] and [Rotate Sort]
check boxes.
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 99 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Saving data for repeat
printing
You can save print data to the device HDD, and
enter a password in the control panel to repeat
printing several times.
Note
z
If there is insufcient space on the built-in HDD storing
the print jobs, "File system is full" will be displayed, and
printing will be disabled.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
1
Save the job to the printer.
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
If using PS printer drivers, select
[Store for Re-print] in [Job Type]
in the [Job Options] tab. If using
PCL printer drivers, select [Store for
Re-print] in [Job Type] in the [Job
Options] tab.
(Windows 7 PS printer driver screen)
(Windows 7 PCL printer driver screen)
(5)
Input the "Job Name" and
"Personal ID Number" in the
"
JOB
PIN
"
screen, and click [OK].
z
Request Job Name for each job
When printing is implemented, a screen to enter
the job name will be displayed.
z
Personal ID Number
Set using 4 digits.
z
Job Name
Set using up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
- 100 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
If [Request Job Name for each print
job] is enabled, enter the "Job Name"
in the "Job PIN" screen, and click [OK].
2
Enter the password to print.
(1)
Press the scroll button or .
(2)
Select [Print Secure Job], and
press the [OK] button.
(3)
Select [Stored Job], and press the
[OK] button.
(4)
Use the 10-key pad to enter the
4-digit password for the job to be
printed to start the search.
Memo
z
If the password is entered incorrectly, press the
[BACK] button, and reset.
(5)
Select [Print], and press the [OK]
button.
Print Secure Job
Encrypted Job
Stored Job
Use
Online
button
to
return
to
standby
screen
Stored Job 1/1 Page
Print
Memo
z
Select [Delete], and press the [OK] button to
delete a job.
(6)
Use 10-key pad or the scroll
buttons
or to enter the print
quantity, and press the [OK]
button.
Reference
z
You can use the Conguration Tool to delete the secure
print job. For details, see “Deleting unnecessary jobs from
the HDD” (P.186).
- 101 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing using registered
forms (overlay printing)
You can register forms, logos, etc., as forms to
the device, and overlay for printing.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
z
For how to set up the Conguration Tool, see “Conguration
Tool” (P.180).
z
If using Windows PS printer drivers, PC administrator
privileges are required.
Memo
z
Overlay is the form group. You can register 3 forms to 1
overlay. Forms and overlays are overlaid in the order of
registration.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Create and register the form to the
device.
For details, see “Registering forms (form
overlay)” (P.185).
2
Register the form to the printer drivers
to print.
(1)
Click [Start], and then select
[Devices and Printers].
(2)
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PS)] icon, and select [Printing
Preferences]>[OKI (product name)
(PS)].
(3)
Select the [Job Options] tab.
(4)
Click [Overlays].
(5)
Select [Use Overlays] from the
drop-down list, and click [New].
(6)
Enter the form name registered
using the Conguration Tool in
[Form Name], and click [Add].
(7)
Enter the [Overlay Name], and
select the page to which the
overlay will be applied using [Print
on Pages]. If specifying the page
to be applied, select "Form Name",
and enter the pages for application
in [Custom Pages].
(8)
Click [OK].
(9)
Select the overlay to be used from
the [Dened Overlays] list, and
click [Add].
(10)
Click [OK].
(11)
Click [OK] to close the print setup
dialog box.
(12)
Open the le to be printed from the
application.
(13)
Printing will be implemented.
- 102 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Create and register the form to the
device.
For details, see “Registering forms (form
overlay)” (P.185).
2
Register the form to the printer drivers
to print.
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
Click [Overlays] in the [Advanced]
tab.
(5)
Enable [Print Using Active
Overlays] in the [Overlays] screen,
and click [Dene Overlays].
(6)
Enter the [Overlay Name], and
enter the form ID registered using
the Conguration Tool in [ID].
(7)
Select the page to which the
overlay will be applied using [Print
on Pages]. If specifying the page
to be applied, select "Custom", and
enter the pages for application in
[Custom Pages].
(8)
Click [Add].
(9)
Click [Close].
(10)
Select the overlay to be used in
printing from the dened overlays,
and click [Add].
(11)
Printing will be implemented.
- 103 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Automatically switching
trays
If the same paper is set in tray 1, (optional)
trays 2 to 5, and the Multi-Purpose Tray, you can
print continuously from other trays if paper in
the current print tray runs out.
Note
z
Match the paper tray paper weight, paper type, and the
Multi-Purpose Tray paper size, paper weight, and paper
type using the control panel. For detailed, see "Setting
Paper" in "Basic".
1
Set how to use the Multi-Purpose Tray
using the control panel.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press functions numbers [9], [5],
and press the [OK] button.
(3)
Select [When Mismatching], and
press the [OK] button. Check that
is displayed to the left of [When
Mismatching].
(4)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
2
Set [Auto Tray Switch] in the printer
overlay.
- 104 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced Options] in the [Layout]
tab.
5
Select [On] in [Tray Switch].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Paper feed options] in the [Setup]
tab.
5
Enable [Auto Tray Change] in the [Paper
feed options] check box, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 105 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Options] in the [Settings] tab.
5
Enable [Auto] in the [Paper feed
options] check box, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Feed] button in the [Print
Options] panel, and enable the [Tray
Switch] check box.
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 106 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using the printer buffer
You can quickly free the printer from large-
quantity jobs and complex jobs by saving print
jobs to the device HDD.
Note
z
If there is insufcient space on the option built-in
HDD storing the print jobs, "File system is full" will be
displayed, and printing will be disabled.
z
The time to print completion will be slower than if not
spooling.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
Memo
z
If the device is in print standby, print without using the
printer buffer.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Enable the [Job Spool] check box.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 107 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Select [Job Spool], and then select [On]
to change the settings, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Outputting to le without
printing
You can write and save to a le without printing
the print data.
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required.
Using Windows printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(**)] icon (** describes the printer
driver type: PS, PCL6, or XPS), and
select [Printing Preferences]>[OKI
(product name)(**)].
3
Select the [Ports] tab.
4
Select [FILE:] from the port table, and
click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
6
Enter the le name, and click [OK].
- 108 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [PDF], and select the save
method.
4
Enter the le name to be saved
in [Name], and select the save
destination, and click [Save].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Downloading PostScript
les
PostScript les can be downloaded to the device
and printed.
Note
z
This function cannot be used when using TCP/IP networks
only.
1
Start the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select [Download] from the [Remote
print] menu.
3
Select the le to be downloaded, and
click [Open].
When the download has nished, the
PostScript le will be printed.
- 109 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Printing PostScript errors
You can print the error details if a PostScript
error occurs.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Layout] tab.
5
Select [Yes] in [PostScript
Options]>[Send PostScript Error
Handler].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Changing emulation
modes
You can select the emulation mode to be used.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Admin Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Enter the administrator password, and
press the [OK] button.
Memo
z
In the default factory settings, the administrator
password is [aaaaaa].
4
Select [Print Setup], and press the [OK]
button.
- 110 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
5
Select [Personality], and press the [OK]
button.
6
Select the operations mode, and
press the [OK] button. Check that
is displayed to the left of the selected
operations mode.
7
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Changing settings for
mono printing
You can select a mono printing mode you want
to use.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Admin Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Enter the administrator password, and
press the [OK] button.
Memo
z
In the default factory settings, the administrator
password is [aaaaaa].
4
Select [Print Setup], and press the [OK]
button.
- 111 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
5
Select [Mono-Print Mode], and press
the [OK] button.
6
Check that is displayed to the left of
the selected mode.
Use Online button to return...
A4/Letter Override
Resolution
Toner Save
Mono-Print Mode
Default Orientation
Form Length
Print Setup
Use Online button to return...
Color Mode
Auto
Normal Mode
Mono-Print Mode 1/1 Page
7
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Saving the printer driver
settings
You can save the details set using the printer
drivers.
When details that change multiple settings are
saved, the settings for multiple locations will be
changed automatically to the saved details only
for the specied driver settings from the next
time.
Note
z
This function cannot be used with Windows PCL printer
drivers only.
Cannot be used with Windows PS and Mac OS X printer
drivers.
Saving settings
Using Windows PCL and Windows
XPS printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PCL6)] icon, and select [Printing
Preferences]>[OKI (product name)
(PCL6)].
3
Make the printer settings to be saved.
- 112 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
4
With PCL printer drivers, click [Save] in
[Driver Setting] in the [Setup] tab.
With XPS printer drivers, click [Save] in
[Driver Settings] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Enter a name for the settings in [Save
settings as], and click [OK].
Memo
z
Enable the "Form information is kept" check box to
also save the paper settings in the [Setup] tab.
z
You can save up to 14 settings max.
6
Click [OK] to close the print setup
dialog box.
Calling and using saved
settings
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
With PCL printer drivers, select the
settings to be used from [Driver
Settings] in the [Setup] tab.
With XPS printer drivers, select the
settings to be used from [Driver
Settings] in the [Setup] tab.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 113 -
Advanced print functions
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Changing the default printer
driver settings
It is convenient to set frequently used settings
as the default settings.
Using Windows printer drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(**)] icon (** describes the printer
driver type: PS, PCL6, or XPS), and
select [Printing Preferences]>[OKI
(product name)(**)].
3
Check the settings, and click [OK].
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Change the settings.
4
Select [Save Current Settings as Preset]
in [Presets], and enter a suitable
settings name in the "Save Preset"
window, and click [OK].
5
Click [Cancel].
Note
z
Select the settings name saved in [Preset] to print.
- 114 -
Deleting or updating printer drivers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
z
Deleting or updating printer drivers
Deleting the printer
drivers
Using Windows
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required.
z
When Windows starts, restart the PC.
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)(**)]
icon (** describes the printer driver
type: PS, PCL6, or XPS), and select
[Delete Device].
Note
z
If any print queues remain, select [Delete Print
Queue]>[OKI (product name) (**)].
3
If a verication message is displayed,
click [Yes].
Note
z
If a message is displayed while the device is in use,
restart the PC, and implement Steps 1 and 2 again.
4
Select one of the icons in [Devices
and Printers], and click [Print Server
Properties] in the top bar.
5
Select the [Drivers] tab.
6
Click if [Change Driver Settings] is
displayed.
7
Select the driver to be deleted, and
click [Remove].
8
If a message asking whether to delete
the drivers only, or the drivers and
packages from the system, select to
delete drivers and packages, and click
[OK].
9
If a verication message is displayed,
click [Yes].
10
If the [Remove driver and driver
package] dialog box is displayed, click
[Cancel]>[OK].
Note
z
To cancel deletion, restart the PC, and implement
Steps 4 and 10 again.
11
Click [Close] in the [Print Server
Properties] dialog box.
12
Restart the PC.
Note
z
The Network Extension and color swatch utility installed
together with the printer drivers are not deleted even if
the printer drivers are deleted.
If deleting the Network Extension and color swatch utility,
delete from [Control Panel]>[Uninstall Program].
- 115 -
Deleting or updating printer drivers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Using Mac OS X
1
Delete the printer name from the
printer list.
(1)
Select [Apple Menu]>[System
Preferences].
(2)
Click [Print & Scan]. Select the
printer name, and click [-].
(3)
Close [System Preferences].
2
Delete (uninstall) using the installer.
(1)
Set the "Software DVD-ROM" in
your Macintosh.
(2)
Double-click the [OKI] icon.
(3)
Open the [Driver] folder.
(4)
Double-click [Uninstaller].
(5)
Follow the on-screen instructions to
enter the administrator password,
and click [OK] until the uninstaller
closes.
(6)
Click [Finish].
(7)
Remove the "Software DVD-ROM"
from the computer.
Updating the printer
drivers
Using Windows
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required.
z
When Windows starts, restart the PC.
Network connections
1
Set the "AutoPlay".
2
When the "play automatically" window
is displayed, click [Run Setup.exe].
3
When the "User Account Control"
window is displayed, click the [Yes]
button.
4
Read the "Software License Agreement",
and click the [Agree] button.
5
Read the "Environmental advice for
Users", and click the [Next] button.
6
Select the printer to be used, and then
click the [Next] button.
7
Select [USB connection], and click the
[Next] button.
8
Click [Custom Install].
9
Click [Switch to separate screen.].
10
Click the driver to be installed.
11
Click [Next] in the "Check before install"
screen.
12
If the "Check installation" screen is
displayed, select the printer to be
installed, and click [Next].
- 116 -
Deleting or updating printer drivers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
13
Select the installation method, and click
the [OK] button.
z
Updating obsolete drivers, and installing
new drivers
Update the obsolete printer drivers, and
then install the new printer drivers. A
new printer icon will be created as "Copy
1" in addition to the icon for the obsolete
printer drivers.
z
Deleting obsolete drivers, and installing
new drivers
Delete the obsolete printer drivers and
printer icons, and then install the new
printer drivers.
Note
z
If multiple printer drivers have been installed,
delete all the printer drivers. If installing multiple
printer drivers, reinstall.
14
Click [Next] in the "Finish installation"
screen.
USB connections
1
Set the "AutoPlay".
2
When the "play automatically" window
is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
3
When the "User Account Control"
window is displayed, click the [Yes]
button.
4
Read the "Software License Agreement",
and click the [Agree] button.
5
Read the "Environmental advice for
Users", and click the [Next] button.
6
Select the printer to be used, and then
click the [Next] button.
7
Select [USB connection], and click the
[Next] button.
8
Click [Custom Install].
9
Click [Switch to separate screen.].
10
Click the driver to be installed.
11
Click [Next] in the "Check before install"
screen.
- 117 -
Deleting or updating printer drivers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
12
Select the installation method, and click
the [OK] button.
z
Updating obsolete drivers, and installing
new drivers
Update the obsolete printer drivers, and
then install the new printer drivers. A
new printer icon will be created as "Copy
1" in addition to the icon for the obsolete
printer drivers.
z
Deleting obsolete drivers, and installing
new drivers
Delete the obsolete printer drivers and
printer icons, and then install the new
printer drivers.
Note
z
If multiple printer drivers have been installed,
delete all the printer drivers. If installing multiple
printer drivers, reinstall.
13
Connect the printer to the PC. If a
screen prompting you to turn ON the
printer power supply is displayed,
connect the device and PC using a USB
cable, and turn ON the device.
14
Click [Finish] in the "Install completed"
screen.
Using Mac OS X
1
Delete the device from the [Printer
List], and uninstall the printer software
using the installer. For details, see
“Deleting the printer drivers” (P.114).
2
Reinstall the printer software. See the
"Basic
"
for details.
- 118 -
Deleting or updating printer drivers
4
1
2
3
5
Apéndice Índice
Comprobar y cambiar
la conguración de la
impresora utilizando el
panel de control
Cong de
red
Concordar
los colores
Utilización
de software
de utilidades
Funciones de
impresión útiles
Memo
- 119 -
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
2
Matching Colors
Matching colors using the control panel
120
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
128
Matching Colors Using Utilities
……… 150
- 120 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
z
Matching colors using the control panel
Manually compensating
color drift
The printer compensates color drift automatically
according to the conditions of use. If the color
drift is a nuisance, you can also implement
compensation manually.
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press [3], [0], [1], and then press the
[OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
4
The display will return to the standby
screen.
Automatically compensating density
and gradation
The printer compensates density automatically
according to the conditions of use. To
compensate automatically, turn [On] the density
compensating matching setting.
In the default factory settings, density
compensating matching is implemented
automatically.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Calibration], and press the [OK]
button.
3
Select [Auto Density Mode], and press
the [OK] button.
- 121 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
4
Select [On], and press the [OK] button.
Check that
is displayed to the left of
[On].
5
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Manually compensating
density
The printer can implement compensation
periodically using auto density compensation
mode, but if the print density is a nuisance, it
can also be compensated manually.
Memo
z
The density compensation adjustment values are set using [Cyan
density], [Magenta density], [Yellow density], [Black density],
[White density]
*1
, and [Clear density]
*2
on the control panel.
*1: C941/C942/ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only
*2: C941/ES9541/Pro9541 only
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press [3], [0], [0], and press the [OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
4
The display will return to the standby screen.
- 122 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Watermark adjustment for
density compensation
You can adjust the watermarks for the density
based on the density compensation.
Adjust each color separately for the parts where
the density is a nuisance from the print results.
This section explains the procedure for adjusting
the cyan watermarks. Use the same adjustment
procedure also for other colors that you wish to
adjust.
z
Increasing cyan after checking the print results
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press [3], [1], [0], and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
The procedures for adjusting magenta, yellow, and
black are described below.
To adjust magenta, press the [Fn] key, [3], [1],
[1], and [OK] buttons.
To adjust yellow, press the [Fn] key, [3], [1], [2],
and [OK] buttons.
To adjust black, press the [Fn] key, [3], [1], [3],
and [OK] buttons.
3
Specify a larger value than the current
value, and press the [OK] button.
Memo
z
To increase the density, select +1 to +3, and to
decrease the density select -1 to -3.
4
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
5
Press the [Fn] key, [3], [0], [0], and
press the [OK] button.
6
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
- 123 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
7
The display will return to the standby
screen.
8
Printing will be implemented.
If the density is still incorrect, repeat steps
1 to 6.
Adjusting the color balance
(density)
The printer can implement compensation
periodically using auto density compensation
mode, but implement this adjustment to adjust
the color balance in the intervals where auto
density compensation is insufcient.
Note
z
The densities of each color are mutually dependent, so it
is necessary to repeat the adjustments several times until
the correct color balance is reached.
z
The results of the basic [Base Color Tuning] are reected
in the settings in [Fine Color Tuning]. Consequently, if the
[Fine Color Tuning] are adjusted manually, these settings
will be reset, so be careful. The [Black Tuning] settings,
however, are not reset.
z
Printing is disabled if [Local print] in the (optional) print
job accounting is set to [Disable printing] or [Disable color
printing].
1
Printing color matching patterns.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press [3], [0], [2], and press the
[OK] button.
- 124 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(3)
Check that [Execute] has been
selected, and press the [OK]
button.
(4)
The color matching pattern will be
printed.
2
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to check the current
color balance.
(1)
Check the numbers (A-1,2 to
O-1,2) of the pattern that seems
the most similar to the adjacent
CMY mixed colors part and
single color K part from among
the patterns distributed in the
"Highlight", "Mid-Tone", or "Dark"
areas.
Memo
z
If the pattern that seems most similar to the
adjacent CMY mixed colors part and single color
K part in the "Highlight", "Mid-Tone", or "Dark"
areas matches the "Current" on the left or the color
matching pattern, the color balance is normal and
does not require adjustment.
3
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to adjust the color
balance.
(1)
Press the scroll button or .
(2)
Select [Calibration], and press the
[OK] button.
(3)
Select [Base Color Tuning], and
press the [OK] button.
(4)
Specify the number of the pattern
checked in the "Highlight" area,
and press the [OK] button.
- 125 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(5)
Specify the number of the pattern
checked in the "Mid-Tone" area,
and press the [OK] button.
(6)
Specify the number of the pattern
checked in the "Dark" area, and
press the [OK] button.
(7)
The pattern number specied in
each area will be displayed.
If the pattern number is correct,
select [Yes], and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
To respecify the pattern number select [No] to
return to the "Calibration" screen.
(8)
Select [Return], and press the [OK]
button.
(9)
The display will return to the
standby screen.
Memo
z
If the desired color balance is not obtained even
after implementing [Base Color Tuning], adjust
the CMY color balance watermarks manually
using [Adjusting the color balance]. For color
balance watermark adjustments, see "Adjusting
the color balance" (P.126).
z
If the overall tone is still too bright or too dark
even after implementing [Base Color Tuning],
adjust the black tone manually using [Fine
Color Tuning], and then implement [Basic color
Tuning] again. To brighten the overall tone,
adjust the black tone in [Fine Color Tuning] in
the - direction, and to darken the overall tone,
adjust the black tone in [Fine Color Tuning] in
the + direction.
4
Check the color balance adjustment
results.
(1)
Print the color matching patterns.
(2)
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to check the
adjusted results.
If the pattern that seems most
similar to the adjacent CMY mixed
colors part and single color K part
in the "Highlight", "Mid-Tone",
or "Dark" areas matches the
"Current" on the left or the color
matching pattern, the color balance
adjustment is complete.
Repeat Steps 1 to 3 according to
the checked results.
- 126 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Adjusting the color
balance
The printer can implement compensation
periodically using auto density compensation
mode, but implement this adjustment to adjust
the color balance watermarks in the intervals
where auto density compensation is insufcient.
Note
z
The densities of each color are mutually dependent, so it
is necessary to repeat the adjustments several times until
the correct color balance is reached.
z
Printing is disabled if [Local print] in the (optional) print
job accounting is set to [Disable printing] or [Disable color
printing].
1
Print the color matching patterns.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press [3], [0], [2], and press the
[OK] button.
(3)
Check that [Execute] has been
selected, and press the [OK]
button.
(4)
The color matching pattern will be
printed.
2
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to check the current
color balance.
(1)
Check the area to be referenced
using "Fine Color Tuning".
The color matching pattern frames
are arranged in four vertical
columns and 11 horizontal rows.
The four vertical columns represent
from the top cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black, and are printed
as [Cyan], [Magenta], [Yellow] and
[Black].
The 11 horizontal rows represent
the color tone, and dotted lines
are printed under each text for
[Highlight], [Mid-Tone], and [Dark].
3
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to adjust the color
balance watermarks.
If adjusting the color balance, use
the control panel to specify the shade
(Highlight, Dark, and Mid-Tone) of each
color.
This section explains the procedure for
slightly darkening the cyan highlights.
Adjust the watermarks for colors other
than cyan in the same way.
- 127 -
Matching colors using the control panel
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(1)
Press the scroll button or .
(2)
Select [Calibration], and press the
[OK] button.
(3)
Select [Fine Color Tuning], and
press the [OK] button.
(4)
Select [Cyan Tuning], and press
the [OK] button.
(5)
Select [Highlight], and press the
[OK] button.
(6)
Specify a larger value than the
current set value, and press the
[OK] button. Check that
is
displayed to the left of the specied
value.
Memo
z
To slightly increase the darkness, select +0.1
to +4.0, and to slightly decrease the darkness
select -0.1 to -4.0. The black adjustment range,
however, is +0.1 to +3.0 and -0.1 to -3.0.
(7)
Press the [ON LINE] button to
return to the standby screen.
4
Check the color balance adjustment
results.
(1)
Print the color matching patterns.
(2)
Use the print results for the color
matching pattern to check the
adjusted results.
Repeat Steps 1 to 3 according to the
checked results.
- 128 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
z
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
Color matching
What is color matching?
It is important to manage the work processes
from data creation to output based on methods
with color consistency. For example, scanners,
digital cameras, and monitors, etc., express the
blending ratio to which the light of the three
colors "red", "blue", and "green" have been
added against the black as values over the RGB
color space (Additive mixture of colors).
Meanwhile, printers express the blending ratio of
the four toner colors "Cyan", "Magenta", "Yellow",
and "black" over white (white light) with the
three reected colors "red", "blue", and "green"
excluded as values over the CMYK color space.
(Subtractive mixture of colors.).
The RGB color space and CMYK color space are
color spaces dependent on the printer used, and
so when converting the color spaces, the colors
will be different from the reproduced colors
unless consideration is given to the individual
printer characteristics.
To maintain color consistency from data creation
to output, it is necessary to consider the color
differences by device when converting colors.
This process is called "color matching". The
program that implements the color matching is
called the "color management system" (CMS).
The printer can use either printer driver color
matching or application color matching.
Note
z
Even if using color matching, the printed colors may
appear dark compared to the colors on the monitor. This
is because the range of colors that can be reproduced by
the device is narrower than the range of colors that can
be reproduced by the monitor, so even if color matching
is used, the vivid colors on the monitor cannot be
reproduced.
Color matching
(recommended)
Implementing color matching is recommended
for general documents. In general, use this
setting.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Automatic] in [Color Mode] in
the [Color] tab, and then click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 129 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [Automatic] and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Auto Color] in [Color Mode] in
the [Color] tab, and then click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 130 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Select [Automatic] in the [Color] panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Easy color matching
(Ofce colors)
Color matching is the optimum method supplied
for users who frequently use business documents
such as word processing software, spreadsheet
software, and presentation software. Color
matching is implemented for printers using the
colors expressed using RGB colors, which are
used with these software applications.
Color matching is implemented using a special
accelerator (ASIC) that is built into the printer.
When converting the RGB color space print data
to the printer CMYK color space, color matching
processing is applied.
Note
z
If using Windows PCL printer drivers or Windows XPS
printer drivers, color matching is not applied even if
[Automatic] or [Ofce Color] is selected for the CMYK
color space print data. In this case, select "Graphic Pro".
z
If installing ICC prole in Windows, click [Advanced Setup]
in the [Layout] tab, and then select [Disable ICM] in [ICM
Methods].
- 131 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setup Items
z
[Color matching options]
Species the method for expressing the colors
processed using color matching.
z
Monitor - Auto
During color matching, represents
the color by the most ideal method
suiting the document to be printed,
emphasizing compatibility with the
monitor (color temperature 6500K). In
general, use this setting.
z
Monitor - Perceptual
During color matching, represents the
color by the method emphasizing the
gradation suiting the natural image of
photograph and compatibility with the
monitor (color temperature 6500K).
z
Monitor - Vivid
During color matching, represents the
color by the method emphasizing the
vividness suiting the images and text,
and compatibility with the monitor
(color temperature 6500K).
z
Monitor - light
During color matching, represents the
color by the method emphasizing the
gradation suiting the natural image of
photograph and compatibility with the
monitor (color temperature 9300K).
z
Adobe RGB
Indicates while using the input device
with AdobeRGB color characteristics.
z
sRGB
The sRGB colors within the printer's
color gamut are printed without any
modication. Only colors that fall
outside the printer's color gamut are
matched with the outer shell. Suitable
for matching specic colors.
z
[CMYK Ink Simulation]
Select to simulate standard offset print
colors such as Japan Color, SWOP, and ISO
Coated on the device.
Select the target printer ink.
z
[Black Finish]
Sets the black nish when printing in color.
Normally use Auto as is.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Automatic] or [Ofce Color] in
[Color Mode] in the [Color] tab, and
then click [OK].
Note
z
If installing an ICC prole, click [Advanced] in the
[Layout] tab, and then select [Disable ICM] in [ICM
Methods].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 132 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [Automatic] or [Ofce Color] and
click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Auto Color] or [Advanced Color]
in [Color Mode] in the [Color] tab, and
then click [OK].
If [Advanced Color] is selected, change
[Color Matching] and [Black Finish] as
necessary.
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 133 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select either [Automatic] or [Ofce
Color] in the [Color] panel.
If [Ofce Color] is selected, change [Color
Match Using], [CMYK Ink Simulation], and
[Black Finish] as necessary.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Color matching
(GraphicPro)
If using DTP software, Graphic Pro is optimum.
You can specify simulation printing for a user-
selected CMYK output device.
If using an ICC prole for a user-selected
I/O device for color matching, it is necessary to
register the ICC prole to the device beforehand.
For how to register the ICC prole, see
"Registering ICC proles" (P.174).
Note
z
CMYK Link Prole cannot be specied using
PCL printer drivers.
z
If installing ICC prole using Windows PS
printer drivers, click [Advanced Setup] in the
[Layout] tab, and then select [Disable ICM] in
[ICM Methods].
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer
drivers.
z
To register an ICC prole, it is necessary to
mount the (optional) HDD to the device.
- 134 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Graphic Pro] in [Color Mode] in
the [Color] tab, and then click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [Graphic Pro] and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 135 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Select [Graphic Pro] in the [Color]
panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Color matching (color
matching OFF)
Implements printing using the specied colors as
is, without implementing color matching using
the printer drivers or device.
Select if implementing color matching using an
application.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [No Color Matching] in [Color
Mode] in the [Color] tab, and then click
[OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 136 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [No Color Matching] and click
[OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Advanced Color] in the [Color]
tab, and then select [Disabled] in [Color
Matching], and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 137 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Select [No Color Matching] in the [Color]
panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Changing black nish
The nish for the black parts will be changed
when printing in color. This can be used when
the color mode in the printer driver settings is
[Ofce Color] or [Graphic Pro].
Setup Items
z
Black Finish
z
Auto
Creates black using the optimum
methods according to the document to
be printed. This setting can be selected
when the color mode is set to [Ofce
Color].
z
Composite Black (CMYK)
Synthesizes black using cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black toner.
The black is close to brown. Ideal for
photos.
z
True Black (K)
Prints black using black toner only.
Ideal for diagrams and documents.
When printing photos, the dark parts
are blackish.
z
Pure Black Text/Graphics
If black that is dened using the RGB
color space for text and graphics (R=0,
G=0, B=0), or black that is dened using
the CMYK color space (C=0, M=0, Y=0,
K=100%) has been specied, specify
whether to print using black (K) toner only.
z
ON
Prints the text and graphics specied
as black using black (K) toner only.
z
OFF
The text and graphics specied
as black are synthesized using
either black (K) toner only or CMYK
depending on the prole specied in
color matching.
- 138 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Ofce Color] or [Graphic Pro]
in [Color Mode] in the [Color] tab, and
then click [Advanced].
5
Select the black nish method from
[Black Finish]. Further, turn ON or OFF
[Pure Black Text/Graphics] in [Graphic
Pro] mode, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [Ofce Color] or [Graphic Pro].
5
Select the black nish method from
[Black Finish]. Further, turn ON or OFF
[Pure Black Text/Graphics] in [Graphic
Pro] mode, and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 139 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Advanced Color] in [Color Mode]
in the [Color] tab.
5
Select the black nish method from
[Black Finish], and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Graphic Pro] in the [Color]
panel.
4
Select [ICC Prole Color Matching]
in [Mode Selection], and click the
[General] button.
5
Select a suitable item using [Black
Finish] and [Pure Black Text/Graphics].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 140 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Printing using monochrome
(black and white)
The color data is printed using grayscale (shades
of black and white) without touching the print
data.
Note
z
If implementing color printing after printing by specifying
"Monochrome", a delay may occur depending on the
temperature adjustment of the fuser unit.
Memo
z
Even if the cyan (blue), magenta (red), yellow toner
cartridge life has been reached, black&white printing can
be done by specifying "Mono".
However, if the paper weight is set to "Ultra Heavy4",
"Ultra Heavy5" or "Auto" and if the paper weight is
comparable to "Ultra Heavy4", "Ultra Heavy5", set "Mono-
Print Mode" in "Admin Menu" to "Normal Mode".
z
See "Basic" for paper details.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Grayscale] in [Color Mode] in
the [Color] tab, and then click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Monochrome] in [Color Setting]
in the [Setup] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 141 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Grayscale] in [Color Mode] in
the [Color] tab, and then click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Grayscale] in the [Color] panel.
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 142 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Rendering white lines
between text and background
inconspicuous (black overprint)
If imaging 100% black text on a colored
background, you can print (overprint) by
overlaying the text and background parts. Set if
there are gaps such as white lines, etc., in the
borders between the text and background.
Note
z
Not usable with some applications.
z
Cannot be used if the text is not 100% black, the text has
been rendered as graphics by selecting the outlines, or if
the text is an image.
z
If the background color is dark (the toner layer thickness
exceeds 240%), the toner may not be xed securely. For
example, if printing 100% black text on backgrounds
of 50% cyan, 50% magenta, or 50% yellow, the toner
layer thickness is 50+50+50+100=250%, which exceeds
240%.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Color] tab.
5
Enable the [Black overprint] check box,
and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Select [Overprint Black], and then
select [On] in [Settings], and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 143 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Quality 1] in the [Print Options]
panel, and enable the [Black Overprint]
check box.
4
Printing will be implemented.
Calibrating plate
misalignment (trapping)
Use if there are white or colored lines
between two overlapping objects due to print
misalignment.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select the print misalignment calibration
method using [Trapping] in the [Job
Options] tab, and click [OK].
5
Printing will be implemented.
- 144 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Select [Trapping], and then select the
print misalignment calibration method
using [Settings], and click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows XPS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Advanced] in the [Job Options]
tab.
5
Select the print misalignment calibration
method using [Trapping], and click
[OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 145 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Quality 1] button in the
[Print Options] tab, and select the print
misalignment calibration method using
[Trapping].
4
Printing will be implemented.
Simulating print effects
The ink characteristics used in offset printing,
etc., by adjusting the CMYK color data is
simulated by the device.
The ICC proles registered as standard are
described below.
z
RGB prole
sRGB
AdobeRGB
z
CMYK input prole
SWOP
ISO Coated
Japan Color
JMPA
z
CMYK link prole
SWOP
ISO Coated
Japan Color
JMPA
Classic-1
Classic-2
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer drivers.
z
Cannot be used with Mac OS X printer drivers depending
on the application.
z
Enabled when [Color Mode] is set to either [Ofce Color]
or [Graphic Pro].
z
[Classic-1], [Classic-2] is a prole with a purpose to bring
the color closer to the conventional device. You can choose
from 2 types of proles according to your preference.
z
[Classic-1], [Classic-2] can be used when the latest
printer driver and rmware are combined.
- 146 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Select [Graphics Pro] in [Color Mode]
in the [Color] tab, and then click
[Advanced].
5
Select [Printer Simulation], and then
select the ink characteristics to be
simulated using [Simulation Target
Prole].
Memo
z
For business documents, etc., you can select [Ofce
Color] in the [Color] tab in Steps 4 and 5, and then
click [Advanced], and select the ink characteristics
to be simulated using [CMYK Input Prole].
6
Click [OK].
7
Printing will be implemented.
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab, and
select [Graphic Pro].
5
Select [Printer Simulation], and then
select the ink characteristics to be
simulated using [Simulation Target
Prole].
6
Click [OK].
7
Printing will be implemented.
- 147 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Graphic Pro] in the [Color]
panel.
4
Select [Printer Simulation] in [Select
Mode].
5
Click the [Input] button, and select the
ink characteristics to be simulated using
[Simulation Target Prole].
Memo
z
For business documents, etc., you can select
[Ofce Color] in [Color Mode] when setting the
[Color Options] function in Steps 3, 4 and 5, and
then select the ink characteristics to be simulated
using [CMYK Ink Simulation] in the [Ofce Color]
functions settings.
6
Printing will be implemented.
- 148 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Printing using color
analysis (classication
printing)
You can implement color separation printing
of the four colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black even if the application does not have a
separation print function.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PCL and Windows XPS
printer drivers.
z
If using Adobe Illustrator, use the application's separation
print function. Set the printer driver settings to No Color
Matching.
Memo
z
The Separations function is for creating under the print.
Use black toner to print each specied primary color.
There is no function for printing each primary color ink
separately.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
4
Click the [Advanced] button in the
[Color] tab.
5
Select the colors to be printed
separately using [Print color
separations], and then click [OK].
6
Printing will be implemented.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Click the [Quality 2] button in the
[Print Options] panel, and select the
colors to be printed separately using
[Separations].
4
Printing will be implemented.
- 149 -
Matching Colors Using the Printer Drivers
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Disabling the Postscript
Color Matching
Memo
z
Can be used with Mac OS X printer drivers.
This is a function to disable the PostScript Color
Matching for RGB system color space.
If not conducting color matching, you can get
the same print result (color) as the initial state
setting of Windows.
Memo
z
PostScript Color Matching is a standard color matching
mechanism in PS that creates Generic RGB prole based
Color Space Array (CSA) for RGB entered data, converts
RGB to XYZ color space by CSA, and from that XYZ color
space converts into CMYK of printer by using the Color
Rendering Dictionary (CRD) installed in the printer.
Setup Items
z
Un-checked
PostScript Color Matching is not conducted.
z
Checked
PostScript Color Matching will be conducted.
Using Mac OS X printer drivers
1
Open the le to be printed.
2
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
3
Select [Quality 2] in the [Print Options]
panel.
4
Un-check [PS Color Matching].
- 150 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
z
Matching Colors Using Utilities
Color Correct Utility
Changing palette colors
(Windows)
You can use the Color Correct Utility to specify
the palette colors selected using Microsoft Excel
and Word, etc., within the matching range.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each printer driver.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer drivers.
z
Test print using paper of B5 size or greater.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If color matching using the Color Correct Utility, computer
administrator privileges are required.
z
If job restrictions mod is enabled (encrypted jobs only),
sample printing and test printing functions cannot be
used. For job restrictions mode, see "[Admin Setup]"
(P.297).
1
Implement color matching using the
Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility] to start the
Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select [Ofce Palette Tuning], and
click [Next].
(3)
The [Select printer] window will be
displayed. Select the printer to be
used, and click [Next].
The Color Correct Utility will start.
Memo
z
The installed printer drivers will be displayed.
Set up each printer driver.
(4)
The "Select setting" window will be
displayed. Select the setup from the
list box, and click [Print Sample].
"COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE" will be printed.
(COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE)
- 151 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(5)
Click [Next].
The "Ofce Palette Tuning" window will
be displayed.
(6)
Click [Print Palette].
"PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE" will be
printed.
(PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE)
Note
z
Colors marked with an X cannot be matched.
(7)
Compare the palette in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window (screen
colors) and the "Palette color
sample" that have been printed.
Make adjustments if the colors are
different. (An example of matching
the red circles in the palette colors
is given below)
z
PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE
z
"
Ofce Palette Tuning
"
Window
(8)
Click the colors to be matched
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
The "Adjustment values input" screen
will be displayed.
- 152 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(9)
Check the adjustable range using
the X and Y values pull-down
menus, and then click [Cancel].
Memo
z
The adjustable range depends on the colors in
consideration of overall balance.
(10)
Search for the most desirable
color within the matching range
for the colors to be adjusted
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window using the
"COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE", and
check the values (X and Y values)
for the X axis (hue) and Y axis
(brightness).
(11)
Click the colors to be matched
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
The "Adjustment values input" screen
will be displayed.
(12)
Select the X and Y values that have
been checked in (10) using the
"Adjustment values input" screen,
and click [OK].
The display will return to the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
(13)
Click [Print Palette] to print the
"PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE". Check
that the colors in the "PALETTE
COLOR SAMPLE" after the changes
are close to the color samples for
the set values, and click [Next].
To adjust any other colors, repeat
Steps (8) to (13).
(14)
Enter a name for your Color
Settings and click [Save].
- 153 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(15)
Click [OK].
Note
z
If updating or reinstalling the printer drivers,
when the Color Correct Utility is started, the
matched color names that have been created
will be read again. Check that the matched color
name is displayed in [Select setting], and click
[Finish].
(16)
Click [Finish] to nish the Color
Correct Utility.
2
Select and print the settings name
using the printer drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
(4)
Select [Ofce Color] in [Color
Mode] in the [Color] tab, and then
click [Advanced].
(5)
Enable the [Color Correct Utility
Settings] in [RGB Color Settings] in
the [Ofce Color Details] window,
and then select the settings created
using the Color Correct Utility, and
click [OK].
Note
z
If updating or reinstalling the printer drivers,
when the Color Correct Utility is started, the
matched color names that have been created
will be read again. Check that the matched color
name is displayed in [Setup Selection], and click
[Finish].
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
- 154 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
(4)
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab,
and select [Ofce Color].
(5)
Enable [Color Correct Utility
Settings], and then select the
settings created using the Color
Correct Utility, and click [OK].
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
Changing palette colors
(Macintosh)
You can use the Color Correct Utility to specify
the palette colors selected using Microsoft Excel
and Word, etc., within the matching range.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each PPD le.
z
Test print using paper of A4 size or greater.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If job restrictions mod is enabled (encrypted jobs only),
sample printing and test printing functions cannot be
used. For job restrictions mode, see "[Admin Setup]"
(P.297).
1
Implement color matching using the
Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select the target printer.
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed.
(3)
Click [Ofce Palette Tuning].
- 155 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(4)
The "Ofce Palette Tuning" screen
will be displayed. Select the setup
from the list box, and click [Print
Swatches].
"COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE" will be
printed.
(5)
Click [Next].
(6)
Click [Print Palette].
Memo
z
The PPD le select in Step (2) will be displayed
at the lower left of the screen.
"PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE" will be
printed.
Note
z
Colors marked with an X cannot be matched.
- 156 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(7)
Compare the palette in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window (screen
colors) and the "matching color
samples" that have been printed.
Make adjustments if the colors are
different. (An example of matching
the red circles in the palette colors
is given below)
z
PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE
z
"
Ofce Palette Tuning
"
Window
(8)
Click the colors to be matched
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
The "Adjustment values input" screen
will be displayed.
(9)
Check the adjustable range using
the X and Y values popup boxes,
and then click [Cancel].
Memo
z
The adjustable range depends on the colors in
consideration of overall balance.
(10)
Search for the most desirable
color within the matching range
for the colors to be adjusted
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window using the
"COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE", and
check the values (X and Y values)
for the X axis (hue) and Y axis
(brightness).
(11)
Click the colors to be matched
(screen colors) in the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
The "Adjustment values input" screen
will be displayed.
- 157 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(12)
Select the X and Y values that have
been checked in (10) using the
"Adjustment values input" screen,
and click [OK].
The display will return to the "Ofce
Palette Tuning" window.
(13)
Click [Print Palette] to print the
"PALETTE COLOR SAMPLE". Check
that the colors in the "PALETTE
COLOR SAMPLE" after the changes
are close to the color samples for
the set values.
To adjust any other colors, repeat
Steps (8) to (13).
(14)
Enter a name for your Color
Settings and click [Save].
(15)
Click [Finish] to nish the Color
Correct Utility.
(16)
Temporarily delete and then re-
register the printer that was
registered using [Print & Scan] in
the [System Preferences].
2
Select and print the settings name
using the printer drivers.
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Select [Ofce Color] in the [Color]
panel.
(4)
Select the matched color name
created using the Color Correct
Utility in [RGB Color Setting].
(5)
Printing will be implemented.
- 158 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Changing gamma values and
hues (Windows)
Color matching can be implemented by adjusting
the gamma values and hues using the Color
Correct Utility.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each printer driver.
z
Cannot be used with Windows XPS printer drivers.
z
Test print using paper of B5 size or greater.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If using the Color Correct Utility, computer administrator
privileges are required.
z
If job restrictions mod is enabled (encrypted jobs only),
test printing functions cannot be used. For job restrictions
mode, see "[Admin Setup]" (P.297).
1
Use the Color Correct Utility to change
the gamma values and hues, etc.
(1)
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>
[OKI Data]>[Color Correct
Utility]>[Color Correct Utility] to
start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select [Hue & Saturation Tuning],
and click [Next].
(3)
The [Select printer] window will be
displayed. Select the printer to be
adjusted, and click [Next].
The Color Correct Utility will start.
Memo
z
The installed printer drivers will be displayed.
Set up each printer driver.
(4)
The "Select setting" window will be
displayed. Select the basic mode
from the list box, and click [Next].
(5)
Use the slide bars to change and
adjust the Gamma, Hue, Saturation
values.
- 159 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Memo
z
The overall brightness can be adjusted using the
gamma slide bar, and the output colors adjusted
using the hue/brightness slide bars.
z
The further to the left the [Gamma] is adjusted,
the brighter the image.
z
The matched colors can be switched using the
printer color buttons.
z
Adjust the [Hue] for each color either clockwise
(+) or counterclockwise (-) in the color circle.
For example, moving the Y (yellow) slide bar
clockwise (+) the color approaches G (green),
and moving the bar counterclockwise (-) the
color approaches R (red).
C(Cyan) R(Red)
Y(Yellow)G(Green)
B(Blue) M(Magenta)
(+)
(-)
z
[Use printer's unadjusted color.] adjusts so that
the 100% of the primary toner colors are used.
Enable this check box to anchor the [Hue] slider
bar for the relevant color, and adjust so that
printing arranges the toners as described below.
Printer
Colors
Result
Cyan (C) Cyan toner 100%
Magenta (M) Magenta toner 100%
Yellow (Y) Yellow toner 100%
Red (R) Magenta toner 100% + Yellow toner 100%
Green (G) Cyan toner 100% + Yellow toner 100%
Blue (B) Cyan toner 100% + Magenta toner 100%
(6)
Click [Print Palette].
"TEST PRINTING SAMPLE" will be printed.
(7)
Check the adjusted results.
If the desired match results have not
been obtained, repeat Steps (5) and (6).
(8)
Click [Next].
(9)
Enter a name for your Color
Settings and click [Save].
(10)
Click [OK].
Note
z
If updating or reinstalling the printer drivers, when
the Color Correct Utility is started, the matched
color names that have been created will be read
again. Check that the matched color name is
displayed in [Setup Selection], and click [Finish].
(11)
Click [Finish] to nish the Color
Correct Utility.
- 160 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
2
Select and print the settings name
using the printer drivers.
Using Windows PS printer drivers
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
Select [Ofce Color] in [Color
Mode] in the [Color] tab, and then
click [Advanced].
(5)
Enable the [Color Correct Utility
Settings] in [RGB Color Settings] in
the [Ofce Color Details] window,
and then select the settings created
using the Color Correct Utility, and
click [OK].
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
Note
z
If updating or reinstalling the printer drivers,
when the Color Correct Utility is started, the
matched color names that have been created
will be read again. Check that the matched color
name is displayed in [Setup Selection], and click
[Finish].
Using Windows PCL printer drivers
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Click [Advanced] (or
[Preferences]).
(4)
Click [Detail] in the [Setup] tab,
and select [Ofce Color].
(5)
Enable [Color Correct Utility
Settings], and then select the
settings created using the Color
Correct Utility, and click [OK].
(6)
Printing will be implemented.
- 161 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Changing gamma values and
hues (Macintosh)
Color matching can be implemented by adjusting
the gamma values and hues using the Color
Correct Utility.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each PPD le.
z
Test print using paper of A4 size or greater.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If job restrictions mod is enabled (encrypted jobs only),
test printing functions cannot be used. For job restrictions
mode, see "[Admin Setup]" (P.297).
1
Use the Color Correct Utility to change
the gamma values and hues, etc.
(1)
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select the target printer.
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed.
(3)
Click [Gamma / Hue / Saturation
Tuning].
(4)
The "Gamma / Hue / Saturation
Tuning" screen will be displayed.
Select the basic mode from the list
box, and click [Next].
(5)
Use the slide bars to change and
adjust the Gamma, Hue, Saturation
values.
Memo
z
The PPD le select in Step (2) will be displayed
at the lower left of the screen.
z
The overall brightness can be adjusted using the
gamma slide bar, and the output colors adjusted
using the hue/brightness slide bars.
z
The further to the left the "Gamma" is adjusted,
the brighter the image.
z
The matched colors can be switched using the
printer color buttons.
z
Adjust the [Hue] for each color either clockwise
(+) or counterclockwise (-) in the color circle.
For example, moving the Y (yellow) slide bar
clockwise (+) the color approaches G (green),
and moving the bar counterclockwise (-) the
color approaches R (red).
C(Cyan) R(Red)
Y(Yellow)G(Green)
B(Blue) M(Magenta)
(+)
(-)
z
[Use ink primary colors] adjusts so that the
100% of the primary toner colors are used.
Enable this check box to anchor the [Hue] slider
bar for the relevant color, and adjust so that
printing arranges the toners as described below.
- 162 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Printer
Colors
Result
Cyan (C) Cyan toner 100%
Magenta (M) Magenta toner 100%
Yellow (Y) Yellow toner 100%
Red (R) Magenta toner 100% + Yellow toner 100%
Green (G) Cyan toner 100% + Yellow toner 100%
Blue (B) Cyan toner 100% + Magenta toner 100%
(6)
Click [Print Palette].
"TEST PRINTING SAMPLE" will be printed.
(7)
Check the adjusted results.
If the desired match results have not
been obtained, repeat Steps (5) and
(6).
(8)
Enter a name for your Color
Settings and click [Save].
(9)
Close the Color Correct Utility.
(10)
Temporarily delete and then re-
register the printer that was
registered using [Print & Scan] in
the [System Preferences].
2
Select and print the settings name
using the printer drivers.
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.
(3)
Select [Ofce Color] in the [Color]
panel.
(4)
Select the matched color name
created using the Color Correct
Utility in [RGB Color Setting].
(5)
Printing will be implemented.
- 163 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Saving color adjustment
settings (Windows)
You can save the details set using the Color
Correct Utility to a le.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each printer driver.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If using the Color Correct Utility, computer administrator
privileges are required.
1
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>
[OKI Data]>[Color Correct
Utility]>[Color Correct Utility] to
start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select [Import/Export Color
Settings], and click [Next].
(3)
Select the printer whose settings
are to be saved, and click [Next].
The [Import/Export/Delete] screen will
be displayed.
- 164 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
2
Save the settings.
(1)
Click [Export].
(2)
Select the settings to be exported from
the settings list in the "Export Settings"
screen, and click [Export].
Memo
z
Hold down the Ctrl or Shift key when selecting
to select multiple settings.
(3)
Select the save destination, and enter the
settings folder name and click [Save].
(4)
Click [OK].
(5)
Click [Finish] to nish the Color
Correct Utility.
Saving color matching settings
(Macintosh)
You can save the details set using the Color
Correct Utility to a le.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each PPD le.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
1
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select the target printer.
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed.
(3)
Click [Manage Color Settings].
The
"Manage Presets"
screen will be displayed.
Memo
z
The PPD le select in Step (2) will be displayed
at the lower left of the screen.
- 165 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
2
Save the settings.
(1)
Click [Export].
(2)
Select the settings to be exported
from the settings list in the
"Export" screen, and click [Export].
Memo
z
Hold down the Shift key when selecting to select
multiple settings.
(3)
Select the save destination, and
enter the settings folder name and
click [Save].
(4)
Close the Color Correct Utility.
Importing color matching
settings (Windows)
The color matching settings can be read from
the le.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each printer driver.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
z
If using the Color Correct Utility, computer administrator
privileges are required.
1
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>
[OKI Data]>[Color Correct
Utility]>[Color Correct Utility] to
start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select [Import/Export Color
Settings], and click [Next].
- 166 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(3)
Select the printer whose settings
are to be read, and click [Next].
The
"Import/Export Color Settings"
screen
will be displayed.
2
Read the settings.
(1)
Click [Import].
(2)
Select the ".CCM" le in the folder
to which the settings to be read
have been saved, and click [Open].
(3)
Select the settings to be imported
from the settings list in the
"Import Settings" screen, and click
[Import].
Memo
z
Hold down the Ctrl or Shift key when selecting
to select multiple settings.
(4)
Check that the settings have been
read, and click [Finish].
- 167 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Importing color matching
settings (Macintosh)
The color matching settings can be read from
the le.
Note
z
For how to set up the Color Correct Utility, see "Installing
utilities" (P.178).
z
Set up each PPD le.
z
Cannot be used with shared printers.
1
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(1)
Start the Color Correct Utility.
(2)
Select the target printer.
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed.
(3)
Click [Manage Color Settings] .
The
"Manage Presets"
screen will be
displayed.
Memo
z
The PPD le select in Step (2) will be displayed
at the lower left of the screen.
2
Read the settings.
(1)
Click [Import].
(2)
Select the folder to which the
settings to be read have been
saved, and click [Open].
- 168 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(3)
Select the settings to be imported
from the settings list in the
"Import" screen, and click [Import].
Memo
z
Hold down the Shift key when selecting to select
multiple settings.
(4)
Check that the settings have been
read using the "Ofce Palette
Tuning" and "Gamma / Hue /
Saturation Tuning" screens, and
close the Color Correct Utility.
Deleting color matching
settings (Windows)
You can delete unnecessary color matches.
1
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Color Correct Utility]>[Color
Correct Utility] to start the Color Correct
Utility.
2
Select [Import/Export Color Settings],
and click [Next].
3
Select the printer whose settings are to
be deleted, and click [Next].
- 169 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
4
Select the settings to be deleted from
the list, and click [Delete].
5
Click [Yes] to delete the settings.
6
Check that the settings have been
deleted, and click [Finish].
Deleting color matching
settings (Macintosh)
You can delete unnecessary color matches.
1
Start the Color Correct Utility.
2
Select the target printer.
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed.
3
Click [Manage Color Settings].
4
Select the settings to be deleted from
the list, and click [Delete].
5
Click [Yes] to delete the settings.
- 170 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
6
Check that the settings have been
deleted using the "Ofce Palette Tuning"
and "Gamma / Hue / Saturation Tuning"
screens, and close the Color Correct
Utility.
PS Gamma Adjuster
You can adjust the halftone density of the CMYK
colors printed using the device. Use this function
if the photo or graphics colors are too dark.
Note
z
Cannot be used with Windows PCL and Windows XPS
printer drivers.
z
Using this function may make printing slower. To prioritize
speed, in Windows disable "Use printer halftone", and in
Macintosh select [No settings] in [Halftone adjustment].
z
If using Windows, the [Halftone adjustment] menu or its
contents may not be displayed in the [Color] tab of the
printer drivers. In this case, restart your PC.
z
If the application is used before the halftone adjustment
name has been registered, restart the application before
printing.
z
If multiple printers have been saved to the [Devices and
printers] folder, the registered halftone adjustment names
will be enabled for all printers of the same model.
Registering gamma (Windows)
1
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>[OKI
Data]>[PS Gamma Adjuster]>[PS
Gamma Adjuster] to start the PS
Gamma Adjuster.
2
Select the device from [Select Printer].
3
Click [New].
- 171 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
4
Adjust the halftone.
You can select the halftone adjustment
method from the graph line operations,
gamma value inputs, and density value
inputs to the text boxes.
5
Enter the settings name in [Gamma
Curve Name], and click [OK].
6
Click [Add].
7
Click [Apply].
The dialog box will be displayed.
8
Click [OK].
9
Click [Finish] to close the PS Gamma
Adjuster.
Registering gamma
(Macintosh)
1
Start the PS Gamma Adjuster.
2
Click [Dene new halftone adjustment].
3
Adjust the halftone.
You can select the halftone adjustment
method from the graph line operations,
gamma value inputs, and density value
inputs to the text boxes.
4
Enter the settings name in [Halftone
adjustment name], and click [Save].
5
Close the PS Gamma Adjuster.
6
Select [Printers and scanners] in the
[System environment settings], and
then temporarily delete and then re-
register the printer that implemented
the registered adjustments.
- 172 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Color Swatch Utility
Operations environment
The color swatch utility is a utility for using the
device to print RGB color samples. By viewing
the printed color samples, you can check which
RGB values should be specied using the
application to print the desired colors.
Note
Cannot be used by Macintosh.
The color swatch utility is installed together with the
printer drivers.
Printing RGB color samples
1
Print sample colors.
(1)
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>
[OKI Data]>[Color Swatch
Utility]>[Color Swatch Utility] to
start the color swatch utility.
(2)
Click the [Print] button.
(3)
Select the device.
(4)
Click [OK] or [Print].
3 pages of color samples will be printed.
(Samples)
Color
block
Color
values
R: 255
G: 203
B: 220
Memo
z
The RGB values displayed below the color block
denote the proportions (0 to 255) of the R (red),
G (green), and B (blue) colors in the color block.
(5)
Select the color to be printed from
the printed color samples, and note
down the printed RGB value.
Memo
z
If there are no colors in the color samples that
you want to print, customize the color samples
using the following procedure.
(6)
Click the [Switch] button to switch
to custom color samples.
(7)
Click the [Advanced] button to
display the [Edit Custom Color
Swatch] dialog box.
(8)
Adjust the three bars until the
desired colors are displayed in the
monitor window, and click [Close].
z
Hue: Changes the hue. 0 denotes red, and to
increase the value, rotate once towards the
green direction.
Increase
0
z
Saturation: Changes the vividness. The greater
the saturation the more vivid, and the lower the
saturation, the darker (grayer) the result.
Saturation 100
Saturation 0
z
Brightness: Changes the darkness. If the
brightness is at maximum (100%), the image
turns white, and at its darkest (0%), the image
turns black.
Brightness 0 Brightness 100
(9)
Click the [Print] button.
(10)
Select the device.
(11)
Click [OK] or [Print].
1 page will be printed by the device.
(12)
If the desired color cannot be found
in the color samples, repeat Steps
(6) to (11).
- 173 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
2
Print the desired color from the
application.
(1)
Open the le to be printed.
(2)
Select text and graphics in the
application, and change the RGB
values of the color samples to be
printed.
Note
z
For how to specify the colors using the
application, see the relevant application manual.
(3)
Printing will be implemented.
Note
z
If printing the desired colors from the application, use the
same printer driver settings as the settings used to print
the color samples.
Prole assistant
This section explains the prole assistant utility.
You can match the colors using the printer ICC
proles. ICC proles are used for overall color
management. To use this function, it is necessary
to register the ICC proles for the input devices
(monitors, scanners, digital cameras, etc.) in the
printer beforehand. To register an ICC prole,
use the prole assistant.
Note
z
The prole assistant is not enclosed on the "Software
DVD-ROM", so download it from the OKI Data homepage.
z
If there are no proles in the input or output devices,
consult the device manufacturer or your dealer.
z
To register an ICC prole, it is necessary to mount the
(optional) HDD to the device.
- 174 -
Matching Colors Using Utilities
4
3
5
1
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Registering ICC proles
You can match the colors using the printer ICC
proles. ICC proles are used for overall color
management. To use this function, it is necessary
to register the ICC proles for the input devices
(monitors, scanners, digital cameras, etc.) in the
printer beforehand.
Note
z
If there are no proles in the input or output devices,
consult the device manufacturer or your dealer.
Windows
Use the Conguration Tool. For the
procedure details, see "Storage Manager
plug-in" (P.184).
Mac OS X
Note
z
The prole assistant is not enclosed on the "Software
DVD-ROM", so download it from the OKI Data homepage.
1
Start the prole assistant.
2
Select the [Networks] or [USB] tab.
If the device is connected using USB, select
[USB]. If the device is connected using a
network, select [Networks].
3
Select the device to be registered, and
click [Select].
Note
z
Not compatible with USB2.0. If using this utility
with USB, set the device USB baud rate to 12Mbps
to connect using USB1.1.
4
Click [Add] in the main window.
5
Select the prole to be registered, and
click [Select].
Memo
z
ICC proles are normally stored in the [Library]>
[ColorSync]>[Proles] folder.
If you cannot nd the ICC proles, consult your
device manufacturer.
6
Select the prole type.
7
Select the number of the prole to be
registered.
The registered numbers are underlined in
bold. If a registered number is selected, the
prole will be overwritten.
8
If necessary, enter a comment in the
[Comments] eld.
The comments are displayed in the prole
tables and the color prole list reports.
9
Click [Add].
10
Check that the registered proles are
displayed in the main window list, and
select [File] and then [Close].
Memo
z
Registered proles can be used in color matching for the
[Graphic Pro] functions.
z
Steps 2 and 3 are omitted when the prole assistant
utility is started subsequently, and the utility is connected
to the device that was last used. To change the connected
printer, select [Printer selection] in Step 4.
Reference
z
For how to print the color prole list, see "Color prole
list" (P.269).
- 175 -
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
3
Using Utility
Software
Utility software that can be used
with the printer
…………………………… 176
Windows utilities
………………………… 180
Mac OS X utilities
………………………… 204
- 176 -
Utility software that can be used with the printer
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
z
Utility software that can be used with the printer
Utilities table
Windows/Macintosh common utilities
Utility name Explanation Operations environment
Reference
pages.
PS Gamma Adjuster Image density can be adjusted by
adjusting each of the CMYK colors and
the halftone density.
z
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
z
Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.10
Page 170
Color Correct Utility Adjusts the color matching.
You can change the overall orientation
of the output colors by adjusting the
palette color output colors, gamma
values, and primary color hue and
saturation.
Page 150
Web browsers You can make all the settings in
addition to checking the messages
displayed on the device, and the
network settings, etc.
PCs with Microsoft Internet
Explorer Ver. 6.0 or later,
Safari Ver. 3.0 or later, or
Firefox 3.0 or later installed.
Page 229
Print jobs
Accounting client
*1
Sets the user name and user ID in the
printer drivers.
z
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
z
Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.10
Page 188
Page 205
*1: Not included on the Software DVD-ROM. Download from the OKI Data homepage.
Windows utilities
Utility name Explanation Operations environment
Reference
pages.
Conguration Tool Registers and manages the device
network settings in the device HDD.
Further, form data can be registered
and deleted, and stored jobs
managed.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
Page 180
ColorSwatchUtility Print sample colors. Use this utility
to check the print colors. This utility
is installed automatically when the
printer drivers are installed.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
Page 172
Direct Network Printing Utility
(LPR)
You can print using network
connections, manage print jobs, and
check the device status.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
PCs operating using TCP/IP
Page 194
- 177 -
Utility software that can be used with the printer
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Utility name Explanation Operations environment
Reference
pages.
Network Extension You can check the settings and set
the optional congurations from the
printer drivers.
This utility is installed automatically
when the printer drivers are installed
using a network connection.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
PCs operating using TCP/IP
Page 201
Web Driver Installer
*1
This application displayed the
devices and printer connected to the
network, downloads the printer driver
installation modules, and installs to
the client PC.
Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
For details, see the OKI Data
homepage.
-
TELNET You can set the device networks. Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
-
PDF Print Direct You can print PDF les without starting
the application.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
Page 187
Change the Printer Display
Language
You can change the display language
of the control panel and menus.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8/
Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2012 R2/
Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008
Page 192
*1: Not included on the Software DVD-ROM. Download from the OKI Data homepage.
- 178 -
Utility software that can be used with the printer
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Macintosh utilities
Utility name Explanation Operations environment
Reference
pages.
Prole assistant
*1
Registers and manages ICC proles in
the device HDD. ICC proles are used
on color matching in [Graphic Pro]
mode in the drivers.
Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.10
Page 173
Panel language setup You can change the display language
of the control panel and menus.
Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.10
Page 204
NIC settings tool Enables the network setup. Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.10
Page 207
*1: Not included on the Software DVD-ROM. Download from the OKI Data homepage.
Installing utilities
Windows
Use the following procedure to install the utility
software to be used.
1
Set the "Software DVD-ROM".
2
When the "AutoPlay" window is
displayed, click [Launch Setup.exe].
3
When the "User Account Control"
window is displayed, click the [Yes]
button.
4
Read the "Software License Agreement",
and click the [Agree] button.
5
Read the "Environmental advice for
Users", and click the [Next] button.
6
Select the printer to be used, and then
click the [Next] button.
7
Select the printer connection method,
and click the [Next] button. (In this
example, network connection is
selected.)
- 179 -
Utility software that can be used with the printer
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
8
Click [Custom Install].
9
Enable the check box for the software
to be installed, and click [Install].
10
Check the software, and click [Start].
11
When the installation has nished, click
the [Exit] button.
12
Click the [Exit] button in the menu
window to nish.
Macintosh
Use the following procedure to install the utility
software to be used.
1
Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" in the
computer.
2
Double-click [OKI]>[Utilities] folder.
3
Drag and drop to copy the utility folder
to be installed into the desired location.
Memo
z
Double-click the utility icon in the folder to launch.
- 180 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
z
Windows utilities
Conguration Tool
Conguration Tool is a utility that changes and manages the OKI device settings.
Conguration Tool has the following functions to easily set and manage multiple OKI devices.
z
Displays the device information
z
Registers and manages ICC proles
z
Registers and deletes form data
z
Manages saved jobs
z
Formats partitions
z
Changes HDD partition sizes
z
Initializes ash memory
z
Sets printer networks
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008 versions
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
z
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP1 or later must be installed.
Installing
1
Set the "Software DVD-ROM".
2
When the "AutoPlay" window is
displayed, click [Launch Setup.exe].
3
When the "User Account Control"
window is displayed, click the [Yes]
button.
4
Read the "Software License Agreement",
and click the [Agree] button.
5
Read the "Environmental advice for
Users", and click the [Next] button.
- 181 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
6
Select the printer to be used, and then
click the [Next] button.
7
Select the printer connection method,
and click the [Next] button. (In this
example, network connection is
selected.)
8
Click [Custom Install].
9
Click [Switch to another screen.], and
then click [Conguration Tool].
10
Select the plug-in to be installed.
z
Network Setting plug-in
Restart the IP address settings and printer,
and display web pages. Added to the plug-
in menu when installed. For details, see
“Network Setting plug-in” (P.183).
z
Storage Manager plug-in
Includes functions such as ICC prole
registration and management functions, form
data registration and deletion functions, and
saved job management functions, etc. Added to
the plug-in menu when installed. For details, see
“Storage Manager plug-in” (P.184).
Memo
z
Plug-ins can also be installed additionally later.
11
Specify the installation destination
folder.
In the factory settings, C:\Program Files\
Okidata\Conguration Tool is specied.
12
Click [Install].
13
When
"
Installation nished
"
is displayed,
click [Exit].
Memo
z
When the restart window is displayed, restart the PC
according to the window instructions.
- 182 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Registering devices
When using the Conguration Tool for the rst
time or introducing a new OKI device, register
the OKI device in the Conguration Tool.
1
Select [Start]>[All programs]>
[OKI Data]>[Conguration Tool]>
[Conguration Tool] to start the
Conguration Tool.
2
Select "Register Device" in the "Tools"
menu to search for OKI devices that
can be registered.
Memo
z
To change the scope of the search, select
"Environment Settings" in the "Tools" menu, and
enter the range to be searched. Enter the range,
and click [OK].
3
Enable the check box for the OKI device
to be set and managed, and click
[Register].
4
Click either or [Cancel] in the upper
right of the window to close the
"Register Device" window.
- 183 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Device Info tab
You can view the OKI device status and
advanced information.
This function is available with the Conguration
Tool as standard.
1
Click the OKI device whose information
you want to view from "Registered
Device Table".
The OKI device status will be displayed.
Memo
z
To change the information, click [Update Device
Information].
Note
z
The device status will be displayed if an OKI device
is connected to the network.
Network Setting plug-in
The network can be set using the Conguration
Tool. Before making the settings, install the
Network Setting plug-in.
Reference
z
For how to set up the network, see the "Basic".
Icon types
The icon meanings are described below.
Icon Explanation
Searches for the device again.
Changes the search conditions.
Changes the device IP address.
Restarts the device.
Changes the network password.
Displays the web page for the
specied device.
Searching for devices on the
network
You can search for devices.
1
Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2
Select [Discover Devices].
The search results will be displayed.
- 184 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Specifying the search conditions
1
Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2
Select [Environment Settings].
3
Specify the search conditions as
necessary, and click [OK].
Changing IP addresses
You can change the device IP address.
1
Select the device from the printer table.
2
Click .
3
Change the settings as necessary.
4
Click [Setup].
5
Input the network password, and click
[OK].
The factory-set password is the last six
alphanumeric characters of the MAC
address.
6
Click [OK] to restart the device.
Storage Manager plug-in
Storage Manager plug-in can manage jobs saved
on the device, and store the forms, fonts, and
ICC proles to be used in printing.
Note
z
The job management function does not support encrypted
card authentication jobs.
Icon types
The icon meanings are described below.
Icon Explanation
Creates new project
Opens projects
Saves projects
Saves projects as...
Adds les to a project
Deletes les from a project
Displays the ltering window for PCL
form les
Creates download les
Sends download les
Sends projects
Sends les
Displays the job management
window
Displays the administrator functions
window
- 185 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Registering proles
You can register and edit printer proles. Some
of the functions are explained below.
To register an ICC prole, it is necessary to
mount the (optional) HDD to the device.
Note
z
If using the prole registration and edit functions, install
the Storage Manager plug-in.
Reference
z
For how to install plug-ins, see “Installing” (P.180).
1
Select [Storage Manager] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2
Click [ ] to create a new project.
3
Click [ ], and change [File type] in the
[Open le] dialog box to "ICC prole
(*.ICC, *.ICM)".
4
Select the prole to be registered, and
click [Open].
5
Click [Component] in the ICC prole
added to the project to display the [Edit
le] dialog box.
6
Select the number of the prole to be
registered.
The numbers already used in the project
cannot be selected, and are displayed
against a yellow background.
7
If necessary, enter a comment in the
[Comments] eld.
8
Click the [OK] button to apply the changes.
9
Select the printer from the device list at
the bottom of the window.
10
Click [ ] to send the project associated to
the ICC prole that has been added to the
printer.
11
Check that the message "Command
Issued." is displayed, and click [OK].
Registering forms (form overlay)
You can register the logos, etc., as forms to the
device, and overlay for printing. This section
explains how to register forms.
Reference
z
For how to print overlays, see “Printing using registered
forms (overlay printing)” (P.101).
Memo
z
If using Windows PS printer drivers, administrator
privileges are required.
Creating forms
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(**)] icon (** describes the printer
driver type: PS, PCL6), and select
[Printer properties].
3
Select the [Port] tab, and enable the
[FILE:] check box in [Printer port], and
click [OK].
4
Create the form to be registered to the
printer.
5
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
the application.
If using Windows PCL printer drivers, go to
Step 9.
6
Click [Advanced] (or [Preferences]).
7
Select the [Job Options] tab, and click
[Overlay].
8
Select [Create form].
9
Printing will be implemented.
10
Enter the name of the le to be saved.
11
Restore [Printer port] in the [Port] tab
which was modied in Step 3.
- 186 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Register the form to the printer using the
Conguration Tool.
1
Select [Storage Manager] from the
[Plug-ins] menu.
2
Click [ ].
3
Click [ ], and select the form le that
has been created.
The form will be added to the project.
4
Click the form le.
5
Enter the [ID], and click [OK].
Note
z
Do not change the [Volume] or [Path name].
Memo
z
If using Windows PS printer drivers, enter the
[Component].
6
Select the device using the window
below the Storage manager plug-in
window.
7
Click [ ].
8
Click [OK].
Checking the available HDD and
ash memory space
You can check the available HDD and ash
memory space.
1
Click the printer name from the device
selection area below the Storage
Manager plug-in screen to display
the resource window for the selected
printer.
2
Communications with the printer
will display the storage, partitions,
directories, and les, etc.
Deleting unnecessary jobs from
the HDD
You can delete print jobs in the [Shared]
partition of the HDD.
Memo
z
Even after the print data has been secure printed or
saved, the job remains in the [Shared] partition, so
unless the job is deleted, the available HDD space will be
reduced.
Note
z
The Storage manager plug-in cannot delete encrypted
secure prints.
1
Click [ ].
2
To view specic user print jobs, enter
the password, and then click [Job
password operations].
To view all print jobs, enter the
administrator password, and then click
[Administrator password operations].
The default administrator password is
"aaaaaa".
3
Select the job to be deleted, and click
[ ].
4
Click [OK].
- 187 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
PDF Print Direct
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008 versions
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
z
Some PDF les may not print correctly. If printing is
incorrect, print from an application such as Adobe Acrobat
Reader.
z
This function is not compatible with multi-page printing.
z
PDF les encrypted at 128bit-RC4 level cannot be printed.
z
If printing PDF les that the viewer is not authorized to
print, specify the master password.
z
If job restrictions mod is enabled (encrypted jobs only),
printing using this utility is disabled. For job restrictions
mode, see “[Admin Setup]” (P.297).
Printing PDF les
1
Check that the [OKI (product name)
(**)] icon (** describes the type of
printer driver: PS, PCL6, or XPS) is in
the [Devices and printers] folder.
2
Select the PDF le to be printed, and
click the right mouse button. The
following menu will be displayed, so
select "PDF Print Direct".
3
If the PDF le is printable, the lower
window will be displayed. Select the
printer driver to be used in [Select
Printer].
4
If printing encrypted les, enable the
[Setting password] check box, and
enter a password. If using the same
password subsequently, click [Save
password]. One password can be
registered.
If deleting password, click [Delete
saved password].
5
Set the required items, and click [Print].
- 188 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Print Job Accounting client
This utility sets the user name and user ID in the
printer drivers.
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008 Versions
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
Installing
1
Double-click the le downloaded from
the OKI Data homepage.
The le will be unpacked and the installer
will start automatically.
2
Implement setup according to the
displayed instructions.
Changing job account modes
Job account mode is the method for setting the
user name and user ID in the Windows client PC.
There are 4 modes.
Job account mode types
z
Tab mode
The tab for setting the user name and user ID is
displayed in the printer driver properties.
Use if the user themselves is setting or changing
the user name and user ID.
z
Popup mode
A popup window to set the user name and user
ID is displayed for each print job to be sent.
Use if multiple users are sharing a single PC.
Note
z
Input windows are not displayed even if printing
using a shared printer client. Use non-display mode
with shared printers.
z
Non-display mode
Input windows are not displayed even if
printing using a shared printer client. Use
non-display mode with shared printers. The
system administrator creates beforehand the
ID le that describes the user ID and user
name corresponding to the login user name for
Windows. Specify this le in the client software
to identify the user implementing the printing,
and to acquire the corresponding user ID
automatically. Further, it is also possible to set
the same user ID for all login users. The user
does not need to make settings or know their
own user ID. If designating the Windows PC
as the printer server and using the device as a
shared printer, install and use the client software
on the PC used as the printer server.
z
Incompatible mode
All jobs are identied as unregistered IDs
without user ID being implemented. The log
retains the user name as the login user name to
Windows and the user ID as 0. Use if user ID is
not necessary.
Note
z
If updating and reinstalling the printer drivers,
incompatible mode is used, so reset the job account mode
again. If using functions to set all the printer drivers to
the same mode, however, it is not necessary to reset the
mode.
Using in tab mode
1
Select [Start]>[All programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Print Job Accounting
Client]>[Change Job Account Mode] to
start the job accounting client.
2
Select the printer drivers for the device
set from the [Driver] list. To set all
printer drivers to the same mode,
enable the [Set the same mode for all
drivers] check box.
3
Select [Tab] and click [Change].
- 189 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
4
Click [OK] in the change notication
window.
5
Select [Close] in the [File] menu.
6
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
7
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(**)] icon (** describes the printer
driver type: PS, PCL6, or XPS), and
select [Printer properties].
8
Enter the user name and user ID in the
[Job Accounting] tab, and click [OK]. In
the default settings, the user name is
the Windows login user name, and the
user ID is "1".
(Windows 7 PCL drivers window)
9
Print from the applications.
Using in popup mode
1
Select [Start]>[All programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Print Job Accounting Client]>
[Change Job Account Mode] to start the
print job accounting client.
2
Select the printer drivers set from the
[Driver] list. To set all printer drivers
to the same mode, enable the [Set the
same mode for all drivers] check box.
3
Select [Popup] and click [Change].
4
Click [OK] in the change notication
window.
5
Select [Exit] in the [File] menu.
6
Print from the applications.
7
The popup window will be displayed, so
enter the user name and user ID, and
click [OK].
When [Cancel] is clicked, the user name is
blank, and user ID remains as 0 in the log.
The print job is not canceled.
- 190 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using in non-display mode
Using by switching user ID for each user
in non-display mode
1
Create the ID le using the MemoPad
or commercially-available spreadsheet
software, etc.
z
Using MemoPad
(1)
Describe the login user name, user ID,
and user name for each user per line.
Separate the login user name, user ID,
and user name with a ",".
Login user name:
User name entered when logging into
Windows
User ID:
User ID corresponding to the login
user ID
User name:
User name used in print job accounting
The user name can be omitted. When
not specied, the login user name is
used as the user name.
Login user
name
User
name
User ID
(2)
Designate the le extension as
"CSV" in text format to save.
z
Using commercially-available
spreadsheet software
(1)
Describe the login user name, user ID,
and user name for each user per line.
(2)
Save the le in CSV format.
2
Select [Start]>[All programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Print Job Accounting Client]>
[Change Job Account Mode] to start the
job accounting client.
3
Select the printer drivers set from the
[Driver] list. To set all printer drivers
to the same mode, enable the [Set the
same mode for all drivers] check box.
Note
z
If using a shared printer, do not use functions that
set all printer drivers to the same mode. Account
information is not output if printing using a shared
printer client.
4
Select [Hide] and click [Change].
5
Click [OK] in the change notication window.
6
Select [Import ID le] from the [Hide
Mode] menu.
7
Specify the ID le created in Step 1,
and click [Open].
8
If the [Set xed Job Account ID for all
users] check box in the [Hide Mode]
menu is enabled, disable the check box.
9
Select [Exit] in the [File] menu.
10
Print from the applications.
- 191 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Note
z
If logging into Windows to print using a login user name
that is not registered, the user name will be the current
login user name, and the user ID will remain in the log as 0.
Memo
z
Select "Display registered user IDs" in the non-display
mode menu to check user names that are already
registered, delete unnecessary user IDs, and import ID
les.
z
Select "Get user information from le" in the non-display
mode menu to acquire the user information registered in
the separate print job accounting client.
Using all users as the same user ID in
non-display mode
1
Select [Start]>[All programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Print Job Accounting Client]>
[Change Job Account Mode] to start the
job accounting client.
2
Select the printer drivers set from the
[Driver] list. To set all printer drivers
to the same mode, enable the [Set the
same mode for all drivers] check box.
Note
z
If using a shared printer, do not use functions that
set all printer drivers to the same mode. Account
information is not output if printing using a shared
printer client.
3
Select [Hide] and click [Change].
4
Click [OK] in the change notication
window.
5
Enable the [Set xed Job Account ID for
all users] check box in the [Hide Mode]
menu.
6
Select [Setup Fixed Job Account ID] in
the [Hide Mode] menu.
7
Enter the user name and user ID, and
click [OK].
Memo
z
If the user name is omitted, the login user name is
used as the user name.
8
Select [Exit] in the [File] menu.
9
Print from the applications.
- 192 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using in incompatible mode
1
Select [Start]>[All programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Print Job Accounting Client]>
[Change Job Account Mode] to start the
job accounting client.
2
Select the printer drivers set from the
[Driver] list. To set all printer drivers
to the same mode, enable the [Set the
same mode for all drivers] check box.
3
Select [Not supported] and click
[Change].
4
Click [OK] in the change notication
window.
5
Select [Exit] in the [File] menu.
6
Print from the applications.
Change the Printer Display
Language
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista//Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008 Versions
Note
z
This program uses the printer drivers. Install the latest
printer drivers beforehand. For details, see "Flow for
Installing Drivers on the PC" in "Basic".
Switching the control panel
language
1
Turn ON the device power supply.
2
Set the "Software DVD-ROM". The
setup program will start.
3
Read the "Software License Agreement",
and click
"
Agree
"
.
4
Read the environment advice, and click
"
Next
"
.
5
Select the printer to be set, and then
click
"
Next
"
.
6
Select the printer connection method,
and click
"
Next
"
.
7
Click "Advanced Device Setup".
8
Click [Next].
Memo
z
The tool version will be displayed after "Printer
display language setup wizard Ver." in the title bar.
- 193 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
9
Select the printer whose language is to
be changed, and click [Next].
Memo
z
Printers supported by the tool will be displayed in
the [Usable printers] list.
10
Select the language to be set up, and
click [Next].
11
If a verication message is displayed,
click [Yes].
12
Click [Print Test Page] to print the
menu. Click [Next].
Memo
z
The menu print results are used in the subsequent
window.
13
Check that the "Language format"
in the menu print results is within
the numerical range displayed in the
window, and click [Next].
14
Select the details to be set up, and click [Setup].
Memo
z
The [Language version:] window displays the
language version of the language le included in the
tool.
15
Click [Finish].
16
Look at the device control panel to
verify that the download was successful,
and restart the device.
Power OFF/ON
Message Data Received
OK
English display image
- 194 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Direct Network Printing
Utility (LPR)
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows
Server 2008 Versions
PCs operating using TCP/IP
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
z
Print method functions cannot be used.
Starting up
1
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Direct Network Printing Utility
(LPR)] to start the Direct Network
Printing Utility (LPR).
The following window will be displayed.
Displayed if “Printing using
multiple printers simultane-
ously” (P.197) has been set.
The number of jobs (data)
that have nished
sending will be displayed.
The number of
jobs (data) that
have not yet
been sent will be
displayed.
The status of the Direct Network
Printing Utility (LPR) data will be
displayed. (This is different from the
actual printer status.)
Displayed if "Display
comments" has been
set using Adding
comments” (P.199).
Printers registered
to the OKI LPR
utility
Downloading les to the printer
Files can be downloaded to the device.
1
Select the device.
2
Select [Download] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3
Select the le to be downloaded, and
click [Open].
The le download will start.
- 195 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Checking/deleting/
transferring jobs
You can display and delete print jobs.
If you cannot print as the printer is in use,
ofine, or there is no paper, you can send the
print job to another printer.
Note
z
You cannot send to printers manufactured by other
companies.
z
Forward to the same model name.
1
Select the device.
2
Select [Job Status] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
The job will be displayed.
3
Select the print job to be deleted, and
select [Delete Job] from the [Job]
menu.
The job will be deleted.
4
Select the print job to be forwarded,
and select the destination printer using
[Redirect] in the [Job] menu.
The job will be sent to the destination
printer.
Note
z
For a printer to implement forwarding, it is necessary
to set up the Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR)
beforehand.
Checking the printer status
You can display the device status.
1
Select the device.
2
Select [Printer Status] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
The device status will be displayed.
Memo
z
You can also check using "Status" in the job display dialog
box.
- 196 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Adding printers
You can change the printer destination port to
OKI LPR port.
Note
z
You cannot set a printer that is already registered in the
Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR). To change the port,
select "Reset printer".
1
Select [Add Printer] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
2
Select the printer name to be added
using [Printer Name], and enter the
printer IP address in [IP Address] and
click [OK].
Note
z
Displayed in [Printer Name] only if the printer drivers
have been added to the [Devices and printers] folder. Not
displayed if set in the network printers.
Memo
z
You can also click [Discover] to search for OKI Data
printers on the network.
The printer is added to the main window.
Automatically transferring jobs
If you cannot print as the printer is in use,
ofine, or there is a paper jam, you can send the
print job to another printer automatically.
Note
z
You cannot send to printer manufactured by other companies.
z
Make sure to forward to the same model name.
1
Select the device.
2
Select [Conrm Connections] from the
[Remote Print] menu.
3
Click [Details].
4
Enable the [Automatic Job Redirect
Used] check box.
To forward only if a printer error such as "Ofine"
or "Paper out" occurs, also enable the [Forward
only during an error] check box.
- 197 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
5
Click [Add], and set the destination IP
address.
Memo
z
You can also click [Discover] to search for OKI Data
printers on the network.
6
Repeat the operation in Step 5 as
many times as there are candidate
destinations.
Memo
z
To change the destination priority ranking, select
the printer whose priority is to be changed using [IP
addresses of printers to which job is automatically
redirected], and then click the [
] and [
] buttons.
(Clicking the [
] button will increase the priority,
and clicking [
] will decrease the priority.)
7
Click [OK].
Printing using multiple printers
simultaneously
You can print to multiple printers using the one-
time print instruction.
Note
z
Make sure to specify the same model for the printers to
print simultaneously.
1
Select the printers.
2
Select [Conrm Connections] from the
[Remote Print] menu.
3
Click [Details].
4
Enable the [Print to more than one
printer at a time] check box, and click
[Options].
- 198 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
5
Click [Add], and set the IP addresses of
the printers to print simultaneously.
Memo
z
You can also add comments to the printers to print
simultaneously. See “Adding comments” (P.199).
6
Repeat the operation in Step 5 as many
times as there are printers to be added.
Memo
z
Click [Save list] to save the information for the
added printers.
z
The saved printer information an be read and
deleted by clicking [Load list].
7
Click [OK].
Starting the web browser
Start your web browser to set the printer
network and menus using the Direct Network
Printing Utility (LPR).
Memo
z
For how to set up the settings, see the "Basic".
1
Select the device.
2
Select [Web Setting] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
Memo
z
If the web port number has been changed, change
the port number setup of the Direct Network
Printing Utility (LPR) using the following procedure.
(1)
Select the device.
(2)
Select [Conrm Connections] from
the [Remote Print] menu.
(3)
Click [Details].
- 199 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
(4)
Enter the web port number in [Port
Numbers].
(5)
Click [OK].
Adding comments
You can add comments to the printers added to
the Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR).
Memo
z
This is convenient for entering the printer installation site
and optional installations.
1
Select the printers.
2
Select [Conrm Connections] from the
[Remote Print] menu.
3
Enter the comments in [Comment], and
click [OK].
4
Select [Show comments] in the [Option]
menu.
- 200 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting IP addresses
automatically
If the printer IP address changes each time
you connect to the DHCP server and the power
supply is turned ON, you can automatically
detect and reset the IP address that has
changed.
Note
z
The search targets follow the search range settings of the
Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR).
1
Select [Setup] in the [Option] menu.
2
Enable the [Auto Reconnect] check box.
3
Click [OK].
Uninstalling
1
Select [Exit] in the [File] menu.
2
Select [Start]>[All Programs]>[OKI
Data]>[Direct Network Printing Utility
(LPR)]>[Delete OKI LPR Utility] to
delete the Direct Network Printing
Utility (LPR).
When the [user account control] dialog box
is displayed, click [Yes].
3
Click [Yes].
The deletion will start.
- 201 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network Extension
You can easily check the device settings and
set the optional device congurations from the
printer drivers.
Reference
z
Network Extension is installed together with the printer
drivers.
Operations environment
PCs running Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/
Windows Vista/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows
2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server
2008 Versions
PCs operating using TCP/IP
Note
z
The software operates in tandem with the printer drivers,
so it is necessary to install the printer drivers.
z
Network Extension is installed automatically when the
printer drivers are installed using a TCP/IP network
connection.
z
The printer driver connection destination operates only in
the following circumstances.
OKI LPR Port
Standard TCP/IP Port
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
Checking the printer settings
You can check the setup details for the connected
device.
Note
z
Even if Network Extension is installed, the [Options] tab
is not displayed if there is a mismatch with the operations
environment.
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PS)] or [OKI (product name)(PCL6)]
icon, and select [Printer properties].
3
Click the [Status] tab.
4
Click the [Update] button.
(Windows 7 PCL drivers window)
The setup details for the device will be
displayed in the "Device Settings".
5
Click [OK].
Memo
z
Click the [Web Setting] button to start the Web browser
automatically and display the device setup details. For
details, see “Setting the network from the web browser”
(P.229).
- 202 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting options automatically
You can acquire the optional congurations for
the connected and implement the printer driver
setup automatically.
Note
z
Even if Network Extension is installed, setup is disabled if
there is a mismatch with the operations environment.
Windows PS drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PS)] icon, and select [Printer
properties].
3
Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Click [Get installed options
automatically], and click [Setup].
5
Click [OK].
Windows PCL drivers
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and printers].
2
Right-click the [OKI (product name)
(PCL6)] icon, and select [Printer
properties].
3
Click the [Device Options] tab.
4
Click [Get Printer Settings].
5
Click [OK].
Uninstalling
1
Select [Start]>[Control panel], and
click [Uninstall program].
2
Select [OKI Network Extension], and
click [Uninstall].
3
Follow the directions to delete.
- 203 -
Windows utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Web Driver Installer
Note
z
Web Driver Installer is not included on the "Software DVD-
ROM". Download from the OKI Data homepage.
z
For how to install and operate the Web Driver Installer,
see the Web Driver Installer manual.
z
The Web Driver Installer manual can be obtained from the
OKI Data homepage.
- 204 -
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Mac OS X utilities
z
Mac OS X utilities
This section explains utilities you can use in Mac
OS X.
Panel language setup
Setting the printer
You can change the display language of the
control panel.
1
Output the device menu map.
(1)
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen
will be displayed.
(2)
Press [1], [0], [0], and press the
[OK] button.
2
Start the panel language setup utility.
Reference
z
See “Installing utilities” (P.178).
3
Select a connection method.
If [TCP/IP] has been selected, enter the
IP address. You can check the IP address
using the menu map output in Step 1.
4
Click [OK].
5
Check that the value of the "Language
Format" in the menu map and the value
of the language version displayed in the
window match the following conditions.
Condition 1: the least numbers of the
version match
Condition 2: the value of the language
version shown in the window is either the
same or newer (greater) than the value of
the "Language Format"
Memo
z
If condition 1 is not satised, the language
settings cannot be downloaded. If the settings are
downloaded without condition 1 being satised,
an error will be displayed on the control panel. To
recover, restart the device. Even if condition 1 is
satised, if condition 2 is not satised, some of the
settings names may be displayed in English.
6
Select the language.
7
Click [Download].
The le to set the language will be sent
to the device, and a message stating that
transmission has nished will be displayed.
8
Restarts the device.
- 205 -
Mac OS X utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Print Job Accounting client
Installing
1
Double-click the le downloaded from
the OKI Data homepage.
A disk icon will be displayed on the
desktop.
2
Copy the print job accounting client in
the disk icon to the application folder.
Registering user IDs and user
names
Start Print Job Accounting.
Reference
z
See “Installing” (P.205).
1
Click [New].
2
Enter the user ID and user name to be
used in the Mac OS X login name and
Print Job Accounting, and click [Save].
Memo
z
Repeat this operation to register multiple users.
3
Click [Save].
4
Close the client software.
Registering multiple users
simultaneously
You can register multiple user IDs and user
names simultaneously using CSV les. This is
convenient if using Mac OS X with multiple login
user names.
1
Prepare CSV les using commercially-
available software.
CSV les describe in order the Mac OS
X login name, user ID, and user name.
(1)
Enter the Mac OS X login name,
user ID, and user name for each
user in the elds.
Note
z
Enter the user ID in single-byte numbers.
(2)
Save in CSV format.
2
Register using the client software.
(1)
Start Print Job Accounting.
Reference
z
See “Installing” (P.205).
(2)
Select to import from the le
menu.
(3)
Read the CSV le created in Step 1.
(4)
Click [Save].
(5)
Close the client software.
- 206 -
Mac OS X utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Changing user IDs and user
names
You can use the client software to change the
user IDs and user names that have already been
registered.
1
Start Print Job Accounting.
Reference
z
See “Installing” (P.205).
2
Select the user to be changed, and click
[Edit].
3
Enter the new user name and user ID,
and click [Save].
4
Click [Save].
5
Close the client software.
Deleting user IDs and user
names
1
Start Print Job Accounting.
Reference
z
See “Installing” (P.205).
2
Select the user to be deleted, and click
[Delete].
Memo
z
If deleting all registered users, click [Delete All].
3
Click [Save].
4
Close the client software.
- 207 -
Mac OS X utilities
4
5
1
2
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network Card Setup Utility
The network can be set using the Network Card
Setup Utility.
TCP/IP must be enabled to use the Network Card
Setup Utility.
Note
z
Set the TCP/IP.
Setting IP addresses
1
Start the Network Card Setup Utility.
Reference
z
See “Installing utilities” (P.178).
2
Select the device.
3
Select [IP Address Setup] from the
[Setup] menu.
4
Specify the settings as necessary, and
click [Setup].
5
Enter the password, and click [OK].
The factory-set password is the last
six alphanumeric characters of the Mac
address.
The password is case-sensitive.
6
Click [OK] to enable the new settings.
The device network card will restart.
Making web settings
The device network can be set by starting the
web page.
Enabling web settings
1
Select [Web Setup] from the [Setup]
menu.
2
Select [Enable] and click [Setup].
3
Enter the password in [Input password],
and click [OK].
The factory-set password is the last six
alphanumeric characters of the MAC
address.
The password is case-sensitive.
4
Click [OK] in the verication window.
Opening web pages
1
Start the Network Card Setup Utility.
Reference
z
See “Installing utilities” (P.178).
2
Select the device.
3
Select [Display web page] from the
[Setup] menu.
The web page will start, and the device
status page will be displayed.
- 208 -
Mac OS X utilities
4
5
1
3
2
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Finishing the Network Card
Setup Utility
1
Select [Exit] from the [File] menu.
- 209 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
4
Network
Setup
Network setting items …………………… 210
Initializing network settings
………… 223
Using DHCP
………………………………… 224
Using SNMP
………………………………… 227
About IPv6…………………………………… 228
Setting the network from
the web browser
…………………………… 229
- 210 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
z
Network setting items
This section explains the items that can be set using the network functions.
Press the scroll buttons
or on the control panel, and then select [Print printer
information]>[Network] to print a settings list and check the current network settings.
Reference
z
For how to print the network settings list, see “Printing printer information” (P.264).
The network settings can be changed using the device web page, Conguration Tool, and Network Card
Setup Utility. See the following table for the menus that can be used with the utilities.
Device Information
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Administrator
contacts
- - (None) Specify the system administrator contact details
using 255 single-byte characters max.
Printer name - - OKI-(Product
name)-(Last 6
digits of MAC
address)
Set the device name using 31 single-byte
characters max.
Short printer
name
- - (Product
name)-(Last 6
digits of MAC
address)
Set the device short printer name using 15
single-byte characters max.
Installation
location
- - (None) Set the device location using 255 single-byte
characters max.
Printer control
number
- - (None) Set a user-dened number to manage the device
using 32 single-byte characters max.
General Network Setup
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
NetBIOS over
TCP
- - Enable Sets whether to use or not use NetBIOS over
TCP protocols.
EtherTalk - - Disable Sets whether to use or not use EtherTalk
protocols.
Gigabit
network
- - Disable Sets whether to use or not use the Gigabit
network.
Hub
connection
- - Auto Species the baud rate and communications
methods between the hub and the device.
- 211 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
TCP/IP
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network Card
Setup Utility
(Mac OS X)
IP address
setting
IP address
acquisition
method
IP address
acquisition
method
Auto Species the IPv4 address setup methods.
IPv4 address IP address IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the IPv4 address.
Subnet mask Subnet mask Subnet mask xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the subnet mask.
Gateway
address
Default
gateway
address
Default
gateway
address
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the gateway address.
DNS server
address
(primary)
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the IP address of the primary DNS
server.
Make sure to set this item if specifying the STMP
server using the domain name.
DNS server
address
(secondary)
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the IP address of the secondary DNS
server.
Make sure to set this item if specifying the STMP
server using the domain name.
Dynamic DNS - - Disable Species whether to register the information to
the DNS server when the settings have changed.
Domain name - - (None) Sets the domain name for the device.
WINS server
(primary)
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the WINS server name or IP address
(Windows only).
WINS server
(secondary)
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the WINS server name or IP address
(Windows only).
Scope ID - - (None) Species the WINS Scope ID. Specify using 1 to
233 single-byte characters.
Windows - - Disable Species whether to use the Windows auto
detection function.
Macintosh - - Enable Species whether to use the Macintosh auto
detection function.
Printer name - - OKI-(Product
name)-(Last 6
digits of MAC
address)
Species the device name displayed when the
auto detection function is enabled.
WSD Print - - Enable Species whether to use WSD Print.
LLTD - - Enable Species whether to use LLTD.
EtherTalk
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Zone name - - * Species the EtherTalk zone name using 32
single-byte characters max.
Printer name - - (Product
name)
Species the EtherTalk printer name using 31
single-byte characters max.
- 212 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
NetBIOS over TCP
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Short printer
name
- - (Product
name)-(Last 6
digits of MAC
address)
Set the name identied using NetBIOS over TCP
using 15 single-byte characters max.
In Windows, this is displayed in the PrintServer
group for the network PC.
Work group
name
- - PrintServer Sets the work group name displayed in the
Windows network PC using 15 single-byte
characters max.
Master
browser setup
- - Enable Species whether to use the master browser.
Comments - -
EthernetBoard
OkiLAN 9400g
Sets the comments using 48 single-byte
characters max.
Displayed when the Windows Explorer display is
advanced.
E-mail receiving settings
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Use receiving
protocol
- - Disable Specify whether to use the mail receiving
function. Select the protocol you want to use.
POP server
name
- - (None) Specify the POP server name. Input the domain
name and the IP address. If you input the
domain name, please set the DNS accordingly.
POP user ID - - (None) Set the user ID to access the POP server.
POP password - - (None) Set the password to access the POP server.
APOP support - - Disable Specify whether to use APOP.
POP port
number
- - 110 Specify the port number to access the POP
server.
POP receiving
interval
- - 5 mins. Specify the interval to access the POP server for
receiving mails.
Domain lter - - Disable Specify whether to use the domain lter
function.
E-mail from
the following
listed domains
- - Authorization Species whether to accept or block E-mails
from the specied domain.
Domain 1 - 5 - - (None) Specify the domain to which the domain lter
function applies.
SMTP receiving
port number
- - 25 Specify the port number to access this machine
via SMTP.
- 213 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
E-mail sending settings
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
SMTP sending - - Disable Sets whether to use the SMTP (e-mail) send
protocols.
SMTP
Server name
- - None Sets the SMTP server name. Specify the domain
name or IP address. It is necessary to set
DNS(Pri)(Sec) if specifying the domain name.
Printer e-mail
Address
- - None Sets the device e-mail address.
SMTP
Port No.
- - 25 Sets the SMTP port number. In general, use the
default setting.
SMTP
authentication
- - Disable Sets whether to implement SMTP authentication.
User ID - - None Sets the SMTP authentication user ID.
Password - - None Sets the SMTP authentication password.
Additional
information
Setup
Printer model
- - Enable Sets whether to include the printer model name
in the printer information described in the
outgoing mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Network
interface
- - Enable Sets whether to include the network interface
name in the printer information described in the
outgoing mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Printer serial
number
- - Enable Sets whether to include the device serial number
in the printer information described in the
outgoing mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Printer control
number
- - Disable Sets whether to include the device management
number in the printer information described in
the outgoing mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Printer name
- - Disable Sets whether to include the system name in the
printer information described in the outgoing
mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Installation
location
- - Disable Sets whether to include the system location in
the printer information described in the outgoing
mail.
Additional
information
Setup
IP address
- - Enable Sets whether to include the IP address in the
printer information described in the outgoing
mail.
Additional
information
Setup
MAC Address
- - Disable Sets whether to include the MAC address in the
printer information described in the outgoing
mail.
- 214 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
- 214 -
Network setting items
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Additional
information
Setup
Short printer
name
- - Disable Sets whether to include the device short printer
name in the printer information described in the
outgoing mail.
Additional
information
Setup
Printer URL
- - Disable Sets whether to include the device URL in the
printer information described in the outgoing
mail.
Comments - - None Sets the comments added to the end of the
outgoing mail.
Up to 4 lines can be set.
Enter up to 63 characters per line, and a carriage
return is implemented automatically when this
number is exceeded.
Return
destination
e-mail address
- - None Sets the return address. Normally, specify the
mail address of the network administrator.
E-mail
Address 1 to 5
- - None Sets the send destination address. Up to 5
addresses can be specied.
Malfunction
notice
Method
- - Notication
when a
malfunction
occurs
Sets the method for notifying of malfunctions.
Mail
notication
interval
- - 24 Sets the notication interval. Enabled only if
periodic notications are selected.
Consumables
warning
- - Immediate Sets whether to notify you immediately regarding
printer consumables (toner cartridges, image
drum units, etc.)
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is
selected.
Consumables
warning
- - Enable Sets whether to notify you immediately regarding
printer consumables (toner cartridges, image
drum units, etc.)
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Consumables
Error
- - Immediate
Sets whether to notify you of errors regarding printer
consumables (toner cartridges, image drum units,
etc.)
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Consumables
Error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of errors regarding printer
consumables (toner cartridges, image drum units,
etc.)
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Maintenance
unit warnings
- - 2H 0M
Sets whether to notify you regarding maintenance
units (fuser units, belt units, etc.)
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Maintenance
unit warnings
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you regarding maintenance
units (fuser units, belt units, etc.)
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Maintenance
units
Error
- - Immediate
Sets whether to notify you regarding maintenance unit
errors (fuser units, belt units, etc.)
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
- 215 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
- 215 -
Network setting items
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Maintenance
units
Error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you regarding maintenance unit
errors (fuser units, belt units, etc.)
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Rell paper
warning
- - 0H 15M
Sets whether to notify you of paper warnings.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Rell paper
warning
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of paper warnings.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Rell paper
error
- - Immediate
Sets whether to notify you of paper errors.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Rell paper
error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of paper errors.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Paper warning
during printing
- - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of paper feed warnings.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Paper warning
during printing
- - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of paper feed warnings.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Paper error
during printing
- - 2H 0M
Sets whether to notify you of paper feed errors.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Paper error
during printing
Paper
Error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of paper feed errors.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Storage device - - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of storage device warnings.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Storage device - - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of storage device warnings.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Print results
Warning
- - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of malfunction affecting the
print results.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Print results
Warning
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of malfunction affecting the
print results.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Print results
Error
- - 2H 0M
Sets whether to notify you of errors affecting the print
results.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Print results
Error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of errors affecting the print
results.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Interface
errors
Warning
- - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of interface (network, etc.)
warnings.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Interface
errors
Warning
- - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of interface (network, etc.)
warnings.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Interface
errors
Error
- - 2H 0M
Sets whether to notify you of interface (network, etc.)
errors.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Interface
errors
Error
- - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of interface (network, etc.)
errors.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Security - - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of warnings occurring in
the security functions.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
- 216 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Security - - Disable
Sets whether to notify you of warnings occurring in
the security functions.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
Advanced - - 2H 0M
Sets whether to notify you of other major errors.
Enabled only if notify upon occurrence is selected.
Advanced - - Enable
Sets whether to notify you of other major errors.
Enabled only if periodic notications are selected.
SNMP
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Setting SNMP
to be used
- - SNMPv3+v1 Species the SNMP version.
User name - - root Set the SNMPv3 user name using 32 single-byte
characters max.
Secure Print
Setting
Pass phrase
- - (None) Sets the password to create an authentication
key for SNMPv3 packet authentication. Set using
8 to 32 single-byte characters.
Secure Print
Setting
Algorithm
- - MD5
Species the algorithm for SNMPv3 packet
authentication.
Encrypted
settings
Pass phrase
- - (None) Sets the password to create a privacy key for
SNMPv3 packet encryption. Set using 8 to 32
single-byte characters.
Encrypted
settings
Algorithm
- - DES Species the algorithm for SNMPv3 packet
encryption. This value cannot be changed.
New SNMP
read
community
- - public Sets the SNMPv1 read community using 15
single-byte characters max.
New SNMP
write
community
- - public Sets the SNMPv1 write community using 15
single-byte characters max.
SNMP Trap
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Printer trap
community
setup
- - public Sets the printer trap community using 31 single-
byte characters max.
Address 1 to 5 - - 0.0.0.0 Species the trap notication destination. You
can specify up to 5 addresses max.
- 217 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Trap send
authorizations
1 to 5
- - Disable Species whether to use printer trap in TCP
numbers 1 to 5.
Printer restart
1 to 5
- - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages when
the printer is restarted.
Illegal trap
receipt 1 to 5
- - Disable Species whether to use the trap when the
device is accessed using a utility name not set
using [Printer trap community name setup].
Online 1 to 5 - - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages
whenever the device is online.
Ofine 1 to 5 - - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages
whenever the device is ofine.
No paper 1 to
5
- - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages when
the device is out of paper.
Paper jam
1 to 5
- - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages when
a paper jam occurs.
Cover open 1
to 5
- - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages when
the device cover is open.
Printer error 1
to 5
- - Disable Species whether to send SNMP messages when
an error occurs.
IPP
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
IPP - - Disable Species whether to use IPP.
Notices
from the
administrator
- - (None) Enter a message according to the language
selected using [Character code] and [Language].
Character code - - UTF-8 Species the character set used when sending
the settings to the device.
Language - - EN-US
Species the language used in the setup, including
the text strings.
AUTHENTICATION
- - NONE Species whether to use authentication when
implementing IPP printing.
User name 1
to 50
- - (None) Species the user name using 63 single-byte
characters max. If [BASIC] has been selected in
[Secure print].
Password 1 to
50
- - (None) Species the password using 16 single-byte
characters max. If [BASIC] has been selected in
[Secure print].
- 218 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
SNTP
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
SNTP - - Manual Sets whether to use or not use SNTP protocols.
NTP server
(Primary)
- - None Sets the IP address of the (primary) NTP server
that acquires the time.
NTP server
(Secondary)
- - None Sets the IP address of the (secondary) NTP
server that acquires the time.
Time zone - - 00:00 Sets the time difference from GMT.
Summertime - - OFF Sets summertime.
IEEE802.1X
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
IEEE802.1X
- - Disable Species whether to useIEEE802.1X.
EAP type - - EAP-TLS Species the EAP method.
EAP user - - (None) Sets the user name used by EAP using 64 single-
byte characters max.
EAP password - - (None) Sets the password used by EAP using 64 single-
byte characters max. Enabled only if [PEAP] is
selected in [EAP type].
Client
certicate
setup
- - Do not use
SSL/TLS in EAP
authentication
Species whether to use SSL/TLS certicate in
IEEE802.1X authentication. Cannot be used if
SSL/TLS certicate is not installed. Enabled only
if EAP-TLS are selected.
CA certicate
setup
- - Authenticating
the server
Species whether to authenticate the certicate
received from the RADIUS server using CA certicate.
- 219 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
Security
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
NetBIOS over
TCP
- - Enable
Species whether to use NetBIOS over TCP.
EtherTalk - - Disable Species whether to use EtherTalk.
Web (port No.:
80)
Device setup
(web) -
Enabled
Web setup Enable Species whether to access the device using web
pages.
Web - - 80 Species the port number to access the device
web page.
IPP (port No.:
631)
- - Disable Species whether to use IPP.
Telnet - - Disable Species whether to access the device using
Telnet.
FTP - - Disable Species whether to access the device using FTP.
SNMP - - Enable Species whether to access the device using
SNMP.
POP - - Disable Species whether to use POP3.
POP - - 110 Species the port number of POP3.
SNTP - - Disable Species whether to use SNTP.
Local Ports - - Enable Species whether to use specic protocols.
SMTP sending - - 25 Species the SMTP send port number.
Network
functions
Change
password
Change
password
Change
password
(Last 6 digits
of MAC
address)
Sets a new administrator password using 15
single-byte characters max. The password
is case-sensitive. This password is used only
when changing the setup from the utilities. The
administrator password set using the device
cannot be changed from this item.
IP ltering
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
IP ltering - - Disable Species whether to use IP ltering. Make
sure to make the following category settings if
enabling IP ltering. Unless these settings are
made, the device cannot be accessed via TCP/IP.
Start address
1 to 10
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the IP address authorized by access to
the device. You can specify individual addresses
or the address range.
End address
1 to 10
- - 0.0.0.0
Print 1 to 10 - - Disable Species whether to authorize print jobs from
the specied IP address.
Setup 1 to 10 - - Disable Species whether to authorize setup changes
from the specied IP address.
IP address of
the registered
administrator
- - 0.0.0.0
Automatically species the administrator IP address.
Normally only this address can access the device.
All accesses are authorized via proxy servers if the
administrator accesses the server via a proxy server.
- 220 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
MAC address ltering
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
MAC address
ltering
- - Disable Species whether to use MAC address ltering.
This function is used to control access from the
MAC address. Make sure to make the following
category settings if enabling MAC address
ltering. Unless these settings are made, the
device cannot be accessed via a network.
Notications
from the
following MAC
addresses
- - Authorization Species whether to authorize or deny access
from the specied MAC address.
MAC address 1
to 50
- - 00:00:00:
00:00:00
Species the MAC address to which ltering is
applied.
MAC address
of the
registered
administrator
- - 00:00:00:
00:00:00
Automatically species the administrator MAC
address.
Normally only this address can access the device.
All accesses are authorized via proxy servers if
the administrator accesses the server via a proxy
server.
Encryption (SSL/TLS)
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
HTTP/IPP - - Disable
Species whether to encrypt HTTP/IP communications.
HTTP/IPP
encryption
strength
- - Standard Species the encryption strength of HTTP/IPP
communication.
Incoming FTP - - Disable Species whether to encrypt receiving via FTP.
FTP receiving
encryption
strength
- - Standard Species the encryption strength of receiving via
F T P.
SMTP receiving - - Disable Species whether to encrypt receiving via SMTP.
SMTP receiving
encryption
strength
- - Standard Species the encryption strength of receiving via
SMTP.
Select the type
of certicate
used.
- - Using the
certicate
signed by you
Creates your signed certicate. Further, creates
the CSR to be sent to the authenticator, and
installs the certicate issued by the authenticator.
Common
Name
- - (Printer IP
address)
The device IP address is specied when your
signed certicate is created.
Organization
- - (None) Species the formal name of the organization
to which the user belongs using 64 single-byte
characters max.
Organizational Unit
- - (None) Species the name of the sub-group (store, etc.)
to which the user belongs using 64 single-byte
characters max.
Locality - - (None) Species the region name to which the user
belongs using 128 single-byte characters max.
- 221 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
State/Province - - (None) Species the state or prefectural name to
which the user belongs using 128 single-byte
characters max.
Country/
Region
- - (None) Species the country code or region code using 2
single-byte characters.
Key exchange
method
- - RSA Species the key method for encrypted
communications.
Key size - - 1024bit Species the key size for encrypted
communications.
IPSec
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
IPSec - - Disable Species whether to use IPSec.
IP address
1 to 50
- - 0.0.0.0 Species the host that authorizes
communications using IPSec.
IKE encryption
Algorithm
- - AES-CBC 128 Species the IKE encryption method.
IKE hash
Algorithm
- - SHA-1 Species the IKE hash method.
Dife-Hellman
group
- - Group2 Species the Dife - Hellman group used by
"Phase 1 Proposal".
Lifetime - - 28800 (s) Species the "ISAKMP SA" lifetime.
Advance
common key
- - (None) Species the advance common key.
Key PFS - - NOPFS Species whether to use Key PFS (Perfect
Forward Secrecy).
Dife -
Hellman group
when Key PFS
is enabled
- - None Species the Dife - Hellman group used by Key
PFS.
ESP encryption
Algorithm
- - AES-CBC 128 Species the algorithm for the ESP encryption
algorithm.
ESP
authentication
Algorithm
- - SHA-1 Species the algorithm for the ESP authentication
algorithm.
AH
authentication
Algorithm
- - SHA-1 Species the AH authentication algorithm.
Lifetime - - 3600 (s) Species the "IPSec SA" lifetime.
- 222 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Network setting items
Maintenance
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Restarting the
network
- - Implement Use to restart the network card.
Initializing the
network
- - Implement Use to restore the network settings to the factory
settings.
Network scale - - Normal Use the factory settings. [Small] is recommended
provided you are using a small-scale LAN
connecting multiple PCs.
Sleep
cancellation
setting
- - Disable Use the factory settings. Set to "Enable" to
cancel sleep mode using MIB Get.
Web printing
Item
Factory
Default
Settings
Explanation
Web Page
Conguration
Tool/ Network
Setting Plug-in
Network
Card Setup
Utility
(Mac OS X)
Paper feed
tray
- - Auto selection Species the tray used in the print job.
Copies - - 1 Species the copies.
Batch printing - - Disable Species whether to sort the output.
Align to paper
size
- - Enable Species whether to align the document size to
the paper size.
Duplex - - None Species whether to close, and the closure
method, during 2-sided duplex.
Print page
specication
- - Disable Species the pages to be printed.
PDF password - - Disable If printing an encrypted PDF le, select the item
and enter the required password.
- 223 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Initializing network settings
z
Initializing network settings
Note
z
Implementing this operation will initialize all network
settings.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Admin Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Enter the administrator password, and
press the [OK] button.
4
Select [Network Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
Admin Setup 1/3 Page
Network Setup
Print Setup
PS Setup
PCL Setup
XPS Setup
Use Online button to return to standby screen
USB Setup
5
Select [Network Factory Defaults], and
press the [OK] button.
Network Setup 3/3 Page
Network Scale
Hub Link Setting
Network Factory Defaults
Use Online button to return to standby screen
Gigabit Network
6
[Execute] will be displayed, so press
the [OK] button.
Network Scale
Gigabit Network
Hub Link Setting
Network Factory Defaults
Use Online button to return to standby screen
Network Setup
Use Online button to return
Execute
1/1 PageNetwork Factory Defaults
7
The display will return to the standby
screen.
- 224 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using DHCP
z
Using DHCP
The IP address can be acquired from the DHCP server.
Note
z
PC administrator privileges are required for the setup.
z
Incorrectly allocating the IP address may cause major malfunctions such as crashing the network. Thoroughly consult the
network administrator before making the settings.
Setting the DHCP server
DHCP is the protocol that allocates IP addresses
automatically to each TCP/IP network. You can
set a subnet mask in addition to the IP address.
Note
z
Set the DHCP server so that a xed IP address is allocated
to the device. Allocating IP addresses randomly may
disable printing via the network. See the DHCP server
manuals for how to allocate xed IP addresses.
Memo
z
Compatible with the following OS.
Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows
Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
z
The following procedure uses Windows Server 2008 R2 as
an example. Depending on the OS, descriptions may differ.
1
Click [Start], and select [Admin
tools]>[Server manager].
If [DHCP] is already displayed in [Admin
tools], go to Step 8.
2
Select [Add role] in [Role summary].
3
In the [Add role wizard], click [Next].
4
Enable the [DHCP server] check box,
and click [Next].
5
Make settings as necessary following
the on-screen instructions.
6
Check the settings using the [Check
installation options], and click [Install].
7
When the installation has nished, click
the [Exit] button.
8
Click [Start], and select [Admin
tools]>[DHCP] to start the [DHCP]
wizard.
9
Select the server to be used from the
DHCP list.
10
Select [New scope] from the
[Operations] menu.
11
Use the [New scope wizard] to make
the settings as necessary by following
the on-screen instructions.
Memo
z
Make sure to set the default gateway.
z
Select [Activate immediately] in the [Activate
scope] screen.
12
Click [Finish].
13
Select the new scope from the DHCP
list, and select [Reserve].
14
Select [New reservation] from the
[Operations] menu.
15
Make the settings.
16
Click [Add].
17
Click [Exit].
18
Select [Finish] from the [File] menu.
- 225 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using DHCP
Setting the printer
To use the device on a DHCP environment, set
the IP address setup method to automatic.
Further, the default factory setting is to set the
IP address automatically, so implementing this
procedure is unnecessary.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Admin Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Enter the administrator password, and
press the [OK] button.
4
Select [Network Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
Admin Setup 1/3 Page
Network Setup
Print Setup
PS Setup
PCL Setup
XPS Setup
USB Setup
5
Select [IP Address Set], and press the
[OK] button.
Network Setup 1/3 Page
TCP/IP
EtherTalk
IP Address Set
IPv4 Address
Subnet Mask
Use Online button to return to standby screen
NetBIOS over TCP
6
Select [Auto], and press the [OK]
button.
TCP/IP
NetBIOS over TCP
EtherTalk
IP Address Set
IPv4 Address
Subnet Mask
Use Online button to return to standby scr
Network Setup
Use Online button to return
Manual
Auto
1/1 PageIP Address Set
7
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
- 226 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using DHCP
Using on a BOOTP environment
To use the device on a BOOTP environment, set
the IP address setup method to BOOTP.
1
Access the device web page, and log in
as an administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Setup]>[TCP/IP]>[Change
Settings]>[Get IP address automatically
(BOOTP)].
4
Click [Submit].
- 227 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using SNMP
z
Using SNMP
Use SNMP manager compatible with SNMPv3 to encrypt the device controls using SNMP.
1
Access the device web page, and log in
as an administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Setup]>[SNMP]>[Setup].
4
Implement advanced setup by following
the on-screen instructions.
5
Click [Submit].
6
The network will restart, and the new
settings will be enabled.
Memo
z
The device is mounted to the SNMP agent. You can use a
commercially-available SNMP agent to check and change
the device settings. For the device MIB, see the "Software
DVD-ROM", and check the "ASN" le in the [Misc]>[MIB
Files] folder.
- 228 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
About IPv6
z
About IPv6
The device is compatible with IPv6, and the
IPv6 address is acquired automatically. IPv6
addresses cannot be set manually.
The device is compatible with the following
protocols.
z
Print:
LPR
IPP
RAW (Port9100)
FTP
z
Setup:
HTTP
SNMPv1/v3
Telnet
Checking IPv6 addresses
IPv6 addresses are allocated automatically.
1
Access the device web page, and select
[Device information].
2
Select [Network]>[TCP/IP].
Memo
z
If all the global addresses are displayed as "0", it is
possible an error has occurred in the router being used.
Reference
z
Press the scroll buttons
and , and select [Print
Information]>[Network] to check the IPv6 address using
the device network report. For reports and how to print
reports, see “Printing printer information” (P.264).
- 229 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
z
Setting the network from the web browser
Operations environment
PCs with Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6.0 or
later, Safari Ver. 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0 or
later installed.
PCs operating using TCP/IP
Memo
z
Check that the web browser security is set to medium.
The following explanation uses the following
environments as examples.
z
Printer name: C931
z
Printer IP address: 192.168.0.2
z
MAC Address: 00:80:87:84:9C:9B
z
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer
Ver.8.0
Starting up
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the URL "http://printer IP
address/" in the address bar, and press
the Enter key.
The printer status screen will be displayed.
Note
z
If including values to 1 or 2 digits in the IP address, do
not enter "0" before the value. Otherwise, communications
may be disabled.
E.g.: Correct input value: http://192.168.0.2/
Incorrect input value: http://192.168.000.002/
- 230 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Logging in as an
administrator
Note
z
To change the device settings using the web browser, it is
necessary to log in as a device administrator.
1
Click [Administrator Login].
2
Enter "root" in [Username], and the
current password in [Password], and
click [OK].
Memo
z
The password is the same as for the "Administrator
password" in the control panel.
3
Set the printer information that can be
checked using the network, and click
either [OK] or [SKIP].
Note
z
Click [SKIP] to omit the setup.
z
Enable the [Do not show this page again] check
box, and click either [OK] or [SKIP] to disable this
display for subsequent logins.
4
The following screen will be displayed.
- 231 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Items table
: Displayed if logged in as a printer
administrator.
View Information
Item Explanation
Status Displays the current printer status. Displays all
warnings and errors that occurred in the printer
as "malfunction information". Further, you can
also check the operations status of the network
services, printer information tables, and IP
addresses set in the printer. For the status window,
see the “Checking the “Status Window”” (P.234)
page.
Tray Count Displays the print quantity for each tray.
Supplies Life Displays the remaining consumables quantity and
service life.
Usage Report Displays the total print results.
Network You can check the network settings information
such as general information, TCP/IP status,
maintenance information, etc.
System Displays the versions, available memory, available
ash memory, and system information.
Print Information
Item Explanation
Information
Print
You can print and check the information set in the
printer, such as the networks and want lists, etc.
Printer Menu
Item Explanation
General
Printer
Settings
You can set the printer name, printer management
number, and installation location, etc.
Tray
Conguration
You can set paper information such as the paper
size per tray and automatic tray switching, etc.
System
Adjust
You can set printer operations per status, such as
power save ON time, alarm cancellations, timeout
printing, etc.
Print Adjust You can set the print position compensation and
print quality, etc.
Admin Setup
Item Explanation
Network
Setup
You can set the protocols such as TCP/IP and
EtherTalk, etc.
Print Setup You can set print information such as 2-sided
printing and toner save, etc.
PS Setup You can set the PS communications protocol mode.
PCL Setup You can set PCL information such as PCL fonts and
blank page output, etc.
XPS Setup You can set XPS information such as XPS le
unpacking methods, and whether or not to output
blank pages, etc.
Color Setup You can set the color information, such as the
CMYK data conversion process using PostScript
printing.
Management You can set printer information such as power
settings and job cancel settings, etc.
- 232 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Calibration
Item Explanation
Normal
Setting
Adjusts the print image quality such as the color
densities, etc.
Customize
Menu
Implements density compensation and color
misalignment compensation.
Direct Print
Item Explanation
Web Printing You can print by specifying a user-selected PDF
le.
Reference
See
“Printing without printer drivers (Direct
printing)” (P.261).
Job List
Item Explanation
Job List Displays a table of the print jobs sent to the
printer. It is possible to delete unnecessary jobs.
Links
Item Explanation
Links Displays the links set by the administrator in
addition to links set by the manufacturer.
Edit Links The administrator can set links they like. You can
register 5 support links and 5 other links. Enter
URLs including http://.
- 233 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Changing administrator
passwords
You can change the password used when logging
in as a device administrator.
1
Click [Admin Setup]>[Management].
2
Click [Change Password].
3
Enter the new password in [New
Password], and then reenter the new
password in [Verify Password].
Note
z
When entering a password, "●●●●●" will be
displayed on screen.
z
Enter an alphanumeric password from 6 to 12
characters.
z
If entering alphanumerics in the password, correctly
enter capital and small letters.
4
Click [Submit].
5
The settings will be saved to the device.
It is not necessary to restart the device.
Use the new password when logging in as
an administrator the next time.
Note
z
This password is different from the TELNET password.
When the password is changed here, the password when
logging onto the administrator setup menu in the control
panel will also be changed.
- 234 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Checking printer status
from the PC
You can check the status of the device via the
network from the PC.
Checking using the "Status screen"
1
Start the web browser, and display the
"Status" screen.
Checking the "Status Window"
Click [Status Window] to display the following screen.
The printer
status
details
will be
displayed.
Clicking
will up-
date the
printer
status to
the latest
status.
The printer
information
will be
displayed.
Printer status icon Advanced
No errors/online
Minor malfunction
(printing is possible)
Major malfunction
(printing is not possible)
Ofine
Changing printer settings
from the PC
You can change the device setup.
1
Access the device web page, and log in
as an administrator.
2
Make the necessary changes,and click
[Submit].
- 235 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Encrypting communications
(SSL/TLS)
When setting from web pages, during IPP prints,
and when receiving prints using FTP protocols,
you can encrypt the communications between
the PC (client) and printer.
(Communications are encrypted using SSL/TLS)
Setup method
Display the methods for creating certicates on
the printer using the web.
There are 2 types of certicates that can be
created.
z
Personal signature certicate
z
Authenticator certicate (creates CSR)
Memo
z
If the device IP address is changed after the certicate
has been created, that certicate will become invalid. Do
not change the device IP address after the certicate has
been created.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[Security] tab.
3
Click [SSL/TLS].
4
Select the type of certicate created in
Step 1.
5
Enter the Common Name, Organization,
and other items.
Note
z
If "Using a Certicate which a Certication Authority
signed" is selected, follow the authenticator
procedure for the advanced certicate issuing
procedures such as input details, etc.
Memo
z
If personal certicate is selected, the device IP
address will be set in "Common Name".
If changing the key exchange method and
key size, click "Key Exchange method".
(Initial values are RSA, 1024bits. Normally,
use without making any changes.)
- 236 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Personal certicates
If creating an authenticator certicate, go to
Authenticator certicates”.
6
The input details will be displayed.
Check the details, and click [OK]. Create
the certicate.
This completes the personal signed
certicate creation.
The settings will be save in the printer, and
the network functions will restart.
7
Follow Steps 1 to 3 to display the
encrypted (SSL/TLS) setup screen,
and set the protocols to enable the
encryption.
8
Click [Submit].
Go to “Usage methods” (P.237).
Authenticator certicates
6
The input details will be displayed.
Check the details, and click [OK].
7
Extract and send the CSR to the
authenticator. (For authenticator
certicates.)
Note
z
Copy from "----- BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST -----"
to "----- END CERTIFICATE REQUEST -----" in the text
box. CSR send method may be for the authenticator
to paste to the web page, send as a le, or attach to
an e-mail.
- 237 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
8
Install the certicate issued by the
authenticator (using the web). (For
authenticator certicates.)
Follow steps 1 to 3 to display the encryption
(SSL/TLS) setup screen.
Paste the issued certicate from "-----
BEGIN CERTIFICATE -----" to "----- END
CERTIFICATE -----" to the text box, and
click [Submit].
This completes the authenticator signed
certicate creation.
The settings will be save in the printer, and
the network functions will restart.
9
Follow Steps 1 to 3 to display the
encrypted (SSL/TLS) setup screen,
and set the protocols to enable the
encryption.
10
Click [Submit].
Usage methods
1
Start the web browser, and enter
"https://printer IP address" in the
adress eld to connect.
Printing using IPP
You can print using IPP.
Enabling IPP Communications
1
Access the device web page, and log in
as an administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Setup]>[IPP]>[Setup].
4
Implement advanced setup by following
the on-screen instructions.
5
Click [Submit].
Setting up the device as an IPP
printer (Windows)
1
Click [Start], and then select [Devices
and Printers]>[Add printer].
2
Use the [Add printer] wizard to select
[Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth
printer].
3
Select [The printer that I want isn’t
listed] from the table of usable printers.
- 238 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
4
Select [Select a shared printer by
name].
5
Enter "http://printer IP address/ipp" or
"http://printer IP address/ipp/lp", and
click [Next].
6
Click [Have Disk].
7
Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
8
Enter the following values in [Copy
manufacturer’s les from], and click
[Find].
z
PCL drivers:
"D:\Drivers\PCLXL"
z
PS drivers: "D:\Drivers\PS"
z
XPS drivers:
"D:\Drivers\XPS"
Memo
z
The described values are examples where drive D is
the DVD-ROM drive.
z
Select PS if printing from an application (Adobe
Illustrator, etc.) compatible with PostScript. If
printing from another application, select any one.
9
Select the INF le, and click [Open].
10
Click [OK].
11
Select the printer name, and click the
[Next] button.
12
Click [Next].
13
Click [Finish].
14
When the installation has nished, print
a test page.
- 239 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Encrypting
communications (IPSec)
Manipulation prevention and encryption between
the PC (client) and printer are possible at the
network level.
Memo
z
The IKE protocol supported by the device is "IKEv1".
The communications mode supported by the device is
"Transport mode". "Tunnel mode" is not operational.
If IPSec is enabled, printer response may be slow
depending on the network communications status.
Note
z
IPSec cannot operate with mail sending functions and
SNMP Trap functions.
Setup ow
Set up the printer before setting the PC.
Printer setup
Use the web, and follow the procedure to enable
IPSec.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[Security] tab.
3
Click the [IPSec] tab.
4
Enable [IPSec] in "STEP1".
Note
z
When IPSec is "Enable", communications from
the PC with the IP address set in "STEP2" will be
encrypted.
z
If IPSec settings fail because the set parameters and
PC do not match, etc., opening the web page will be
disabled. In this case, either disable [IPSec] in the
network settings from the device control panel, or
disable IPSec by implementing network initialization.
5
Enter the host IP address in "STEP2".
Note
z
Use the IP address to specify the host that
authorizes the printing and setup.
z
For the IPv4 address, use single-byte numbers
separated by "."
z
For the IPv6 global address, use single-byte
alphanumerics separated by "." Abbreviated
notations cannot be used.
z
Disabled if the IP address entered is 0.0.0.0.
- 240 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
6
Set the phase 1 proposal parameters in
"STEP3".
(1)
Select from AES-CBC 256, AES-
CBC 192, AES-CBC 128, 3DES-
CBC, DES-CBC and set in [IKE
Encryption Algorithm].
(2)
Select from SHA-1 and MD5, and
set in [IKE Hash Algorithm].
(3)
Select from Group 2 and Group
1, and set in the [Dife-Hellman
Group].
(4)
Enter the range from 600(s) to
86400(s) in [LifeTime] to set.
7
Set the advance common key in "STEP4".
Enter in [Pre-Shared Key] using 1 to 64
single-byte alphanumerics to set. This
section uses entering "ipsec" in the string
as an example.
8
Set the Key PFS in "STEP5".
(1)
Select from KEYPFS and NOPFS,
and set in [Key PFS].
(2)
If [Key PFS] is selected, select
from Group 2, Group 1,and None,
and set in [Key PFS Dife-Hellman
Group].
- 241 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
9
Set the Phase 2 proposal in "STEP6".
z
Setting [ESP]
(1)
Select from AES-CBC 256, AES-
CBC 192, AES-CBC 128, 3DES-
CBC, DES-CBC and set in [ESP
Encryption Algorithm].
(2)
Select from SHA-1, MD5, and OFF,
and set in [ESP Authentication
Algorithm]. If OFF is selected, the
ESP authentication algorithm is not
applied.
z
Setting [AH]
(1)
Select from SHA-1 and MD5,
and set in [AH Authentication
Algorithm].
(2)
Enter the range from 600(s) to
86400(s) in [LifeTime] to set.
10
Click [Submit].
11
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
- 242 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Computer setup
1
Click [Start], and select [Control
Panel]>[System and Security].
2
Click [Administrative Tools].
Connection security regulations
3
Double-click [Local Security Policy].
4
Right-click [Windows Firewall with
Advanced Security]-[Windows Firewall
with Advanced Security-Local Group
Policy Object]-[Connection Security
Rules], and select [New Rule].
5
Select [Custom], and click [Next].
6
Select end points 1 and 2. Specify as
necessary, and click [Next].
- 243 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
7
Enable the [Require authentication for inbound
connections and request authentication for
outbound connections] check box, and click [Next].
8
Select [Advanced], and click the
[Customize] button.
9
Click the [Add] button in [First authentication].
10
Select [Preshared key], and enter the key.
11
Click the [OK] button.
12
Click [Next].
13
Check that all check boxes have been
selected, and click [Next].
14
Enter a name, and click [Finish].
- 244 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
IPSec setup
15
Open the local security policy in the
management tools.
16
Select [Windows Firewall with Advanced
Security], right-click, and select
[Properties].
17
Select the [IPSec Settings] tab, and
click the [Customize] button in [IPSec
defaults].
18
Select [Advanced] in [Key exchange
(Main Mode)], and click the [Customize]
button.
19
Change the [Security methods] to the
desired settings, and click [OK].
20
Select [Advanced] in [Data protection
(Quick Mode)], and click the
[Customize] button.
- 245 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
21
Enter the desired value, and click [OK].
Note
z
Only the time is supported as the key enabled time.
Set the maximum value to disable the conditions
using the session (IPSec communications data size).
22
Select [Advanced] in [Authentication
method], and click [Customize].
23
Click [Add] in [First authentication].
24
Select [Preshared key] and enter the
key.
25
Click [OK].
26
Click the [OK] button to nish
[Customize IPsec Settings].
27
Click the [OK] button.
- 246 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Using the access
restriction function (IP
lter) with IP addresses
You can manage access to the device using the IP
address.
Note
z
The default device settings to [Disable] the [IP Filtering].
z
If the IP address is entered incorrectly, access to the
device using IP protocols will be disabled. Be very careful
during setup.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[Security] tab.
3
Click [IP Filtering].
4
[Enable] the [IP Filtering] in [STEP1].
Note
z
[Enable] IP ltering to disable all access from IP
address hosts outside the range set in [STEP2].
5
Set the IP address range in [STEP2].
Note
z
Use the IP address to enter the range that
authorizes the printing and setup.
z
For the IP address, use single-byte numbers
separated by "."
z
Disabled if the IP address entered is 0.0.0.0.
z
If IP address ranges overlap, the settings for the
address range with the highest [Priority] will be
prioritized.
z
Regardless of the specications in Step 2, the
administrator addresses that can be printed and set
can be set in Step 3.
6
Click the [Address Range Bar Display/
Refresh].
To correct the IP address range, reenter the
relevant IP address, and click the [Address
Range Bar Display/Refresh] again.
- 247 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
7
Set the value in [Administrators IP
Address setting] in [STEP3].
Even if the incorrect settings were made
in [Step 2] by entering the administrator
IP address in [Administrator’s IP Address
setting], the administrator can reset from
the IP address host set in [Administrator’s
IP Address setting].
Note
z
If accessing the device via a proxy, the address of
the proxy device will be displayed as [Your Current
Local Host/Proxy IP Address]. Consequently, the
"Your host IP address" displayed in your host
address may differ.
z
If nothing is registered as the administrator IP
address, access to the device may be completely
disabled depending on the settings in Step 2.
z
If you do not wish to register an administrator IP
address, leave the [Administrator’s IP Address
setting] eld blank.
8
Click [Submit].
9
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
Using the access
restriction function with
MAC addresses
You can manage access to the device using the
MAC address.
Note
z
If the MAC address is entered incorrectly, access to the
device using a network will be disabled. Be very careful
during setup.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[Security].
3
Click [MAC Address Filtering].
- 248 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
4
[Enable] the [MAC Address Filtering] in
[STEP1].
5
Select whether to [Accept (Deny)]
communications from a specic MAC
address in [STEP2].
Note
z
Use the MAC address to enter the host MAC address
that authorizes (or denies) the communications.
z
For the MAC address, use single-byte numbers
separated by ":".
z
Regardless of the specications in Step 2, the
administrator addresses that can communicate can
be set in Step 3.
6
Set the value in [Administrators MAC
Address setting] in [STEP3].
Even if the incorrect settings were made in
[STEP2] by entering the administrator MAC
address in [Administrator’s MAC Address
setting], the administrator can reset from
the MAC address host set in [Administrators
MAC Address setting].
Note
z
If accessing the device via a proxy, the address of
the proxy device will be displayed as [Your host
MAC address]. Consequently, the [Your host MAC
address] displayed in your host address may differ.
z
If nothing is registered as the administrator MAC
address, access to the device may be completely
disabled depending on the settings in Step 2.
z
If you do not wish to register an administrator
MAC address, enter "00:00:00:00:00:00" in the
[Administrator’s MAC Address setting].
7
Click [Submit].
8
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
- 249 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Notifying errors using
e-mail
The device is equipped with a mail send function
(SMTP). You can send an e-mail if an error occurs
in the printer. You can select to send periodically
whether or not an error has occurred, and set to
send mails when an error occurs.
Setting e-mail sending
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network Setup].
3
Click [Email]>[Send Settings].
4
Enable [SMTP Send] in [STEP1].
5
Set the address required to send in
[STEP2].
(1)
Set the mail server domain name
or IP address in [SMTP Server].
(2)
Set the mail address allocated
to the printer in [Printer Email
Address].
Note
z
If setting the [SMTP Server] in the domain name, it
is necessary to set the DNS server in the [TCP/IP]
settings.
z
It is necessary to authorize sending mail from the
device in the mail server. Consult your network
administrator for the mail server settings.
z
If using Internet Explorer using the default settings,
send tests are disabled.
To implement send tests, it is necessary to change
the Internet Explorer 7 settings.
Enable [Tools]>[Customize security level]>
[Authorize input requests for information using
scripted Windows in web sites].
6
To make more advanced settings
subsequently, click [Set detail of the
SMTP Protocol] in [STEP3].
For all other presses, go to Step 16.
- 250 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
7
Select [Security Settings].
8
Set the mail server port number in
[SMTP Port Number].
9
[Enable] the [SMTP-Auth].
(1)
Set the user ID to connect to the
mail server in [User ID].
(2)
Set the password to connect to the
mail server in [Password].
10
Click [Congure attached information].
11
Select or enter the information to be
added to the end of the e-mail message
to be sent.
12
Click [OK].
13
Click [Others].
14
Set the return mail address for the
mail sent from the printer in [Reply-
To Address]. Normally, set the mail
address of the printer administrator.
15
Click [OK].
16
Click [Submit].
17
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
Memo
z
The authentication method is selected automatically from
the authentication methods supported by the mail server.
- 251 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Notifying errors periodically
using e-mail
Notifying malfunctions periodically
If using periodic notications, disable sleep
mode.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network Setup].
3
Click [Email]>[Alert Settings].
4
Enter the mail address of the
malfunction notice recipient.
5
Click the [Setting] button for the e-mail
address that has been set.
Memo
z
Click the [Copy] button to copy the malfunction
notice information settings to another address. It is
convenient to set the same malfunction notication
conditions in multiple addresses.
6
Enable the [Periodically] check box, and
click [To STEP2].
7
Set the interval for sending mail in
[Email Alert Interval].
Memo
z
If no errors for notication occur within the period,
no mail will be sent.
- 252 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
8
Enable each error to be notied in
[Setting Events Used for Sending Email
Alerts].
9
Click [OK].
10
Check the set details of the malfunction
notications conditions.
z
Displaying tables
(1)
Click the [Show current settings
table] button.
(2)
Check the set details, and close the
window.
z
Comparing the set conditions for 2
addresses
(1)
Use the list box to select each
address to be compared.
(2)
Check the settings details that are
displayed.
Memo
z
You can change the notication condition settings
by clicking the set conditions comparison details.
11
Click [Submit].
12
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
- 253 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Notifying the occurrence of
malfunctions
1
Click [Email]>[Alert Settings].
2
Enter the mail address of the
malfunction notice recipient.
3
Click the [Setting] button for the e-mail
address that has been set.
Memo
z
Click the [Copy] button to copy the malfunction
notice information settings to another address. It is
convenient to set the same malfunction notication
conditions in multiple addresses.
4
Enable the [Upon occurrence of an
event] check box, and click [To STEP2].
5
Enable each error to be notied in
[Setting Events Used for Sending Email
Alerts].
6
Set the mail delay time from error
occurrence to sending.
Memo
z
You can notify only those errors who continue to
occur over a long time using the delay time settings.
z
Set the delay time to "0 Hours 0 Minutes" to send
an e-mail the instant an error occurs.
7
Click [OK].
- 254 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
8
Check the set details of the malfunction
notications conditions.
z
Displaying tables
(1)
Click the [Show current settings
table] button.
(2)
Check the set details, and close the window.
z
Comparing the set conditions for 2 addresses
(1)
Use the list box to select each
address to be compared.
(2)
Check the settings details that are
displayed.
Memo
z
You can change the notication condition settings
by clicking the set conditions comparison details.
9
Click [Submit].
10
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
Using SNMPv3
The device is equipped with a SNMPv3-
compatible agent.
You can safely encrypt the device management
using SNMP if using the SNMPv3-compatible SNMP
manager.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network Setup]
tab.
3
Click [SNMP]>[Settings].
- 255 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
4
Enable the SNMP version to be used
check box in [STEP1], and click [To
STEP2].
Memo
z
If [SNMPv3] is selected, referencing and setups
using SNMPv1 will be disabled. If [SNMPv3+v1] is
selected, both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 can be used for
referencing, but only NMPv3 can be set.
5
Enter the SNMPv3 user name in [User
Name] in [STEP2].
6
Enter the authentication password in
[Passphrase] in [Authentication Settings].
7
Select [Algorithm].
8
Enter the encryption pass phrase in
[Passphrase] in [Privacy (Encription) Settings].
Memo
z
Only [DES] can be selected as the encryption algorithm.
9
Click [Submit].
10
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
Memo
z
Set the context name for the SNMP manager to be used in
"v3context".
- 256 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Using IEEE802.1X
Compatible with authentication functions using
IEEE802.1X.
IEEE802.1X setup ow
To set IEEE802.1X in the device, rst connect
the device and PC for setup via a regular hub.
After completing the IEEE802.1X setup, connect
the device to the authentication switch.
1
Connect the printer and PC.
2
Set the IP address for setup in the PC.
3
Set the IP address for setup in the
printer.
For how to connect the printer and PC,
and set the printer and (Windows) PC IP
addresses, see "Basic".
4
Set IEEE802.1X in the printer.
5
Connect the printer to the
authentication switch.
Setting IEEE802.1X
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network Setup]
tab.
3
Click [IEEE802.1X].
Reference
z
If using PEAP, go to "
Using PEAP". If using EAP-
TLS, go to "
Using EAP-TLS".
- 257 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Using PEAP
4
Select [Enable] in [IEEE802.1X].
5
Select [PEAP] in [EAP Type].
6
Enter the user name in [EAP User].
7
Enter the password in [EAP Password].
8
Enable [Authenticate Server].
9
Click [Import of CA Certicate].
Memo
z
If [Not authenticate Server] is enabled, it is not
necessary to import the CA certicate.
If [Not authenticate Server] is enabled, disable
whether or not to connect to the correct
authentication server.
The "Import of CA Certicate" screen will be
displayed.
10
Enter the CA certicate le name, and
click [OK].
Memo
z
The imported CA certicate is the authenticator
certicate issued by the RADIUS server certicate.
z
Importable le formats are PEM, DER, and PKCS#7
formats.
The CA certicate will be imported to the printer.
11
Click [Submit].
12
The settings will be save in the device,
and the network functions will restart.
If the standby screen is displayed in the
control panel, turn OFF the device power
supply.
Reference
z
For how to turn OFF the power supply, see "Basic".
z
Go to “Connecting the device to the authentication
switch” (P.259).
- 258 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Using EAP-TLS
4
Select [Enable] in [IEEE802.1X].
5
Select [EAP-TLS] in [EAP Type].
6
Enter the user name in [EAP User].
7
Enable the [Not use SSL/TLS Certicate
for EAP authentication] check box.
8
Click [Import of Client Certicate].
The "Import of Client Certicate" screen will
be displayed.
9
Enter the client certicate le name.
Memo
z
The importable certicate le format is PKCS#12.
10
Enter the client certicate password,
and click [OK].
The client certicate will be imported to the
printer.
11
Enable [Authenticate Server].
12
Click [Import of CA Certicate].
Memo
z
If [Not authenticate Server] is enabled, it is not
necessary to import the CA certicate.
If [Not authenticate Server] is enabled, disable
whether or not to connect to the correct
authentication server.
The "Import of CA Certicate" screen will be
displayed.
- 259 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
13
Enter the CA certicate le name, and
click [OK].
Memo
z
The imported CA certicate is the authenticator
certicate issued by the RADIUS server certicate.
z
Importable le formats are PEM, DER, and PKCS#7
formats.
The CA certicate will be imported to the
device.
14
Click [Submit].
15
The settings will be save in the printer,
and the network functions will restart.
If the standby screen is displayed in the
control panel, turn OFF the device power
supply.
Reference
z
For how to turn OFF the power supply, see "Basic".
z
Go to “Connecting the device to the authentication
switch” (P.259).
Connecting the device to the
authentication switch
Memo
z
Check that the device power supply is turned OFF.
1
Insert the LAN cable into the device
LAN (network) interface connector.
2
Insert the LAN cable into the
authentication switch authentication
port.
3
Turn ON the device power supply.
4
Check that the standby screen is
displayed in the control panel.
5
Set the device IP address according to
the environment in use.
- 260 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Changing EtherTalk printer
names (Macintosh)
If using EtherTalk, you can add easily identiable
names to the device.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[EtherTalk] tab.
3
Enter a new name in [EtherTalk Printer
Name], and click [Submit].
Note
z
Settable printer names are 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters max.
z
Do not use symbols (=:*@~
), etc., in the printer
name.
Changing EtherTalk zones
(Macintosh)
You can change the printer from the current zone
to another zone using EtherTalk delineated using
multiple logical zones.
Note
z
Selectable zones are within the same segments.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Click [Admin Setup]>[Network
Setup]>[EtherTalk] tab.
3
Enter a new name in [EtherTalk Zone
Name], and click [Submit].
- 261 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Printing without printer
drivers (Direct printing)
Printing PDF les
You can print PDF les even if the printer drivers
have not been installed.
Specify the le from the web browser to send to
the device.
Note
z
Some PDF les may not print correctly. If printing is
incorrect, print from an application such as Acrobat
Reader.
z
If printing by specifying the print page, device processing
may take some time.
1
Log in as an administrator.
Reference
z
See “Logging in as an administrator” (P.230).
2
Select the [Direct Print] tab.
3
Specify the le to be printed in [STEP1].
Click [Browse] to select the le using the
le dialog box.
4
Set up printing in [STEP2].
5
Click [Print] in [STEP3].
6
Check the print setup, and click [OK].
- 262 -
5
1
2
4
3
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Setting the network from the web browser
Setting the server to print mail
attachments
The printer can print the le attached to the
received mail.
Memo
z
A maximum of 10 les can be printed. However, the
maximum size of the les is 8 MB.
z
PDF, JPEG and TIFF les can be printed.
z
Some PDF les may not be printed correctly. If les cannot
be printed properly, open the le with Adobe Reader for
printing.
Setting POP
1
Access the web page of the printer and
log in as administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Setup]>[Email]>[Receiving
Settings].
4
Select [POP3], and click [STEP2].
5
Perform the settings following the on-
screen instructions.
Memo
z
Make correct settings for the mail server you are
using. If the APOP protocol is disabled, when you
enable APOP, mails may not be correctly received.
z
If you specify a domain name of the mail server, set
the DNS server in the [TCP/IP] setting.
6
Click [Submit].
Setting SMTP
1
Access the web page of the printer and
log in as administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Setup]>[Email]>[Receiving
Settings].
4
Select [SMTP] and click [STEP2].
5
Perform the settings following the on-
screen instructions.
6
Click [Submit].
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 263 -
5
Checking and Changing Printer
Settings Using the Control Panel
Printing printer information …………… 264
Checking print quantities
……………… 276
Checking remaining consumables
and maintenance unit quantities
…… 277
Table of setting items in
the device setup screen
………………… 278
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 264 -
Printing printer information
z
Printing printer information
Printable report tables
List name Explanation
Reference
pages.
Settings details Prints a table of all menu category items and the current
settings. Further, the advanced printer settings are also printed
in the page header.
Page 265
Network functions Prints the network information. Page 266
Demo pages Prints the demo print data stored in the printer. Page 267
File list Prints a table of the les registered to the le system. Page 267
PS font list Prints the PS font samples. Page 269
PCL font list Prints the PCL font samples. Page 269
IBM PPR Font List Prints the IBM PPR font samples. Page 269
EPSON FX Font List Prints the EPSON FX font samples. Page 269
Total print results Prints the total print results. Page 268
Error log Prints the errors detected and saved by the printer. Page 268
Color prole list Prints the color prole list. Page 269
Color matching pattern Prints patterns to match the shading characteristics. Page 123
User media list
*1
Prints the user media list information. Page 270
Test print-1 Prints the patterns for analyzing the print quality. Page 270
Test print-2 Prints the patterns for analyzing the CYMK print quality. Page 270
Test print-3
*2
Prints the patterns for checking the media shrinkage in the case
of spot color overprint.
Page 270
Test print-4
*3
Prints the patterns for analyzing print quality of the spot colors
(white or clear
*4
).
Page 270
*1: Displayed when the user media is registered.
*2: Displayed when white toner is used in C941/ES9541/Pro9541.
*3: Displayed with C941/C942/ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/Pro9542 only.
*4: C941/ES9541/Pro9541 only
Note
z
When printing reports, set A4 size paper in the tray to be used before printing.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 265 -
Printing printer information
Printing printer settings lists
Settings details
Print the device information.
Print to see the remaining quantity of
consumables and other set values such as IP
addresses and MAC addresses, and to check
whether the device print unit is operating
correctly, etc.
How to print
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press functions numbers [1], [0], [0],
and press the [OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Print results samples
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 266 -
Printing printer information
Printing printer information
lists
Network information
Print the device network information.
How to print
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press functions numbers [1], [0], [1],
and press the [OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Function Number
101
Enter 1-3digit Number
Use Online button to return
Execute
1/1 PageNetwork
Print results samples
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 267 -
Printing printer information
File list
Prints a table of the les registered to the le
system.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
3
Select [File List], and press the [OK]
button.
4
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Demo pages
Prints demonstration pages.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
3
Select [Demo Page], and press the [OK]
button.
4
[DEMO1] will be displayed. Select
an item to print, and press the [OK]
button.
5
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 268 -
Printing printer information
Error log
Prints a history of the errors that have occurred
in the device.
How to print
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press functions numbers [1], [0], [3],
and press the [OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Total print results
Prints the total print results.
Memo
z
Not displayed if [Usage Report] of [Print Statistics] is set
to [Disable].
How to print
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical values input screen will
be displayed.
2
Press functions numbers [1], [0], [2],
and press the [OK] button.
3
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
4
Specify the print quantity using the
scroll buttons
, and press the [OK]
button.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 269 -
Printing printer information
Total print results Printing
print lists
Font list
Prints the font samples stored in the device.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
3
Select [PCL Font List], [PS Font List],
[IBM PPR Font List] or [EPSON FX Font
List] and press the [OK] button.
4
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Color prole list
Prints a table of the ICC proles registered to the
le system.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
3
Select [Color Prole List], and press the
[OK] button.
4
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 270 -
Printing printer information
User media list
Prints a table of the user media registered to the
device.
Memo
z
Displayed when the user media is registered.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
3
Select [User Media List], and press the
[OK] button.
4
Check that [Execute] has been selected,
and press the [OK] button.
Test prints
Prints the print quality lists.
z
Test print-1
Prints the patterns for analyzing the print quality.
z
Test print-2
Prints the patterns for analyzing the CMYK print
quality.
z
Test print-3
Prints the patterns for checking the media
shrinkage in the case of spot color overprint.
Memo
z
Displayed when white toner is used in C941/ES9541/
Pro9541.
z
Test print-4
Prints the patterns for analyzing print quality of
the spot colors (white or clear*).
*C941/ES9541/Pro9541 only.
Memo
z
Displayed with C941/C942/ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542 only.
How to print
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Print Information], and press
the [OK] button.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 271 -
Printing printer information
3
Select [Test Print-1], [Test Print-2],
[Test Print-3], or [Test Print-4] and
press the [OK] button.
4
[Execute] will be displayed, so press
the [OK] button.
Registering custom sizes
(irregular paper)
If using custom sizes, set the width and length
of the paper using the control panel.
1
Press the [Fn] key.
The numerical input screen will be
displayed.
2
Enter a function number according to
the paper feed tray to be set.
z
Multi-purpose tray settings
Press functions numbers [9], [0], and
press the [OK] button.
z
Using tray 1
Press functions numbers [1], [0], and
press the [OK] button.
Memo
z
The function numbers for trays 2 to 5 are as
described below.
Tray 2: [Fn] key, [2], [0], and [OK] buttons.
Tray 3: [Fn] key, [3], [0], and [OK] buttons.
Tray 4: [Fn] key, [4], [0], and [OK] buttons.
Tray 5: [Fn] key, [5], [0], and [OK] buttons.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 272 -
Printing printer information
3
Select [Custom], and press the [OK]
button.
4
Check that is displayed to the left of
[Custom], and press the [BACK] button.
5
Set the custom size length and width.
(1)
Select [Y Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(2)
Use the 10-key pad or the scroll
buttons
to enter the length.
(3)
After entering the length, press
the [OK] button. Check that
is
displayed to the left of the entered
value, and press the [BACK]
button.
(4)
Select [X Dimension], and press
the [OK] button.
(5)
Use the 10-key pad or the scroll
buttons
to enter the width.
(6)
After entering the width, press
the [OK] button. Check that
is
displayed to the left of the entered
value, and press the [BACK] button.
6
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 273 -
Printing printer information
Changing administrator
passwords
Change an administrator password. The default
factory setting is [aaaaaa].
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Admin Setup], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Enter the administrator password, and
press the [OK] button.
4
Select [Change Password], and press
the [OK] button.
5
Enter the new password, and press the
[OK] button.
Note
z
Set a password with 6 characters min.
6
Re-enter the new password, and press
the [OK] button.
7
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 274 -
Printing printer information
Restricting button
operations (panel lockout)
Set to restrict button operations so that the
device settings are not changed unintentionally.
1
Press and hold the [OK] button, and
press the power switch.
2
Check that [Boot Menu] has been
selected, and press the [OK] button.
3
Enter the password, and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
This is the same as the administrator password. The
default factory setting is [aaaaaa].
4
Select [Panel Lockout], and press the
[OK] button.
5
Specify the operations buttons mode
to be restricted, and press the [OK]
button.
z
Mode1:
The [BACK] button, scroll buttons ,
and 10-key pad are disabled.
z
Mode2:
The [HELP] button, [BACK] button,
[POWER SAVE] button, scroll buttons
, [CANCEL] button, and 10-key
pad are disabled.
z
Off:
All operations buttons are enabled.
6
Check that is displayed to the left of
the designated mode, and press the [ON
LINE] button. The display will return to
the Boot Menu.
7
Restart the printer.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 275 -
Printing printer information
Restricting menu displays
(menu lockout)
Set to restrict menu operations so that the
device settings are not changed unintentionally.
1
Press and hold the [OK] button, and
press the power switch.
2
Check that [Boot Menu] has been
selected, and press the [OK] button.
3
Enter the password, and press the [OK]
button.
Memo
z
This is the same as the administrator password. The
default factory setting is [aaaaaa].
4
Select [Menu Lockout], and press the
[OK] button.
5
Select [On], and press the [OK] button.
6
Check that is displayed to the left of
[On], and press the [ON LINE] button.
The display will return to the Boot
Menu.
7
Restart the printer.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 276 -
Checking print quantities
z
Checking print quantities
You can check the quantity of printed paper to date. You can also check the quantities printed (fed)
from each tray.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Conguration], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Select [Tray Count], and press the [OK]
button.
4
Select the tray to be checked.
5
Press the [OK] button.
To continue checking other items, press
the [BACK] button and return to 4.
6
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 277 -
Checking remaining consumables and maintenance unit quantities
z
Checking remaining consumables and
maintenance unit quantities
You can check the remaining quantities and service life of the toner, image drum, belt unit, fuser unit,
and waste toner box.
1
Press the scroll button or .
2
Select [Conguration], and press the
[OK] button.
3
Select [Supplies Life], and press the
[OK] button.
4
Select the consumable or maintenance
unit to be checked (Toner, image drum,
belt unit, fuser unit, or waste toner box).
5
Press the [OK] button.
To continue checking other items, press
the [BACK] button and return to 5.
6
Press the [ON LINE] button to return to
the standby screen.
Memo
z
The value to the right of the toner in the remaining
consumables quantity screen changes depending on
the type of toner cartridge installed.
“10.0K” is displayed at the time of product purchase
and when a standard toner cartridge is mounted.
“24.0K” is displayed when a large-capacity toner
cartridge is mounted.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 278 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Device setup screen
Item Details
Conguration You can check the device information (I.e., total number of sheets in each tray,
remaining consumables quantity, paper size set in each tray, system information,
etc.).
Print Information You can print the settings and font list of this machine.
Print Secure Job You can save print jobs to the device HDD, and enter a password to print.
Displayed when the HDD is mounted.
Menus You can set the tray conguration, system settings, print position compensation,
and color, etc.
Admin Setup This is the menu by which the administrator sets the network settings, changes
passwords, etc.
Print Statistics You can check the print use status of the user.
Calibration You can adjust the color densities and shades, and color misalignment, etc.
Boot Menu You can set whether or not to restart the printer when a malfunction occurs in the
HDD or le system, etc.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 279 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Conguration]
Item Details
Tray Count MPTray nnnnnn Displays the total print quantity for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
(This is the number of sheets fed from the Multi-Purpose
Tray.)
Tray1 nnnnnn Displays the total print quantity for tray 1. (This is the
number of sheets fed from the tray 1.)
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The optional
expansion tray
unit is displayed
when mounted.
nnnnnn Displays the total print quantity for each tray. (This is the
number of sheets fed from each tray.)
Supplies Life Cyan Toner (n.nK) Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining toner amount percentage for each
color.
Magenta Toner
(n.nK)
Remaining
nnn%
Yellow Toner (n.nK) Remaining
nnn%
Black Toner (n.nK) Remaining
nnn%
White Toner
(n.nK)
*2
*2:
Displayed with
C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542 only.
Remaining
nnn%
Clear Toner
(n.nK)
*3
*3: Displayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
Remaining
nnn%
Cyan Drum Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the cyan
image drum.
Magenta Drum Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the
magenta image drum.
Yellow Drum Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the yellow
image drum.
Black Drum Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the black
image drum.
White Drum
*2
*2: Displayed with
C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542 only.
Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the white
image drum.
Clear Drum
*3
*3: Displayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the clear
image drum.
Waste Toner Box Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the waste
toner box.
Belt Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the belt
unit.
Fuser Remaining
nnn%
Displays the remaining service life percentage of the fuser
unit.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 280 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Item Details
Network Printer Name
**********
**********
***********
Displays the printer name used by DNS and Network PnP
Short Printer Name *******
********
Displays the short printer name.
IPv4 Address xxx.xxx.
xxx.xxx
Changes the IP address. Displays the control panel
[Administrator menu]>[Network setup]>[IPv4 address]
setup when TCP/IP is enabled.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.
xxx.xxx
Displays the subnet mask. Displays the control panel
[Administrator menu]>[Network setup]>[Subnet mask]
setup when TCP/IP is enabled.
Gateway Address xxx.xxx.
xxx.xxx
Displays the gateway address. Displays the control panel
[Administrator menu]>[Network setup]>[Gateway address]
setup when TCP/IP is enabled.
MAC Address xx:xx:xx:
xx:xx:xx
Displays the MAC address.
Network FW
Version
xx.xx Display the Network rewall version.
Web Remote
Version
xx.xx Displays the web page version.
IPv6 Address
(Local)
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx
Displays the (local) IPv6 address. If TCP/IP is disabled, or
the IP version is IPv4, this menu is not displayed.
IPv6 Address
(Global)
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx
Displays the (global) IPv6 address. If TCP/IP is disabled, or
the IP version is IPv4, this menu is not displayed.
Paper Size in Tray MPTray
A4
Displays the paper size for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Tray1
A4
Displays the paper size for tray 1.
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The optional
expansion
tray unit is
displayed
when
mounted.
A4
Displays the paper size for each tray.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 281 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Item Details
System Serial Number xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx
Displays the serial number.
Asset Number xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxx
Displays the asset number of the printer manager.
Firmware
Version
xxx.xx_x_x Displays the version number of FirmSuite.
CU Version xx.xx
Displays the control unit rmware version.
PU Version xx.xx.xx Displays the print unit rmware version.
RAM xxMB Displays the total availability of all mounted RAM.
Flash
Memory
xxMB[Fxx] Displays the total availability of all ash memory and ash
system versions installed.
HDD
*1
*1: Displayed
when the
HDD (option)
is mounted.
xx.xxGB [Fxx] Displays the HDD size and le system version installed.
Date and Time yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Displays the current date and time.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 282 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Print Information]
Item Details
Conguration Print Prints the device setup details.
Network Print Prints the network information.
Demo Page DEMO1 Print Prints demo pages.
File List Print Prints the color prole list.
PS Font List Print Prints the PostScript font samples.
PCL Font List Print Prints the PCL font samples.
Usage Report
*1
*1: Not displayed if [Print Statistics]>[Usage
Report] is set to [Disable] on the control panel.
Print Prints the total print results.
Error Log Print Prints the error log.
Color Prole List Print Prints the color prole list.
User Media List Print Prints the user media list information.
A method for registering user media
Test Print-1 Print Prints the patterns for analyzing the print quality.
Test Print-2 Print
Prints the patterns for analyzing the CMYK print
quality.
Test Print-3
*1
*1: Displayed when white toner is used in C941/
ES9541/Pro9541.
Print
Prints the patterns for checking the media shrinkage
in the case of spot color overprint.
Test Print-4
*2
*2:
Displayed with C941/C942/ES9541/ES9542/
Pro9541/Pro9542 only.
Print Prints the patterns for analyzing print quality of the
spot colors (white or clear
*3
).
*3: C941/ES9541/Pro9541 only.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 283 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Print Secure Job]
Note
z
Displayed when the HDD (option) is mounted.
z
To enter this menu, it is necessary to enter the password for secure printing.
Item Details
Encrypted Job Not Found This message is displayed when there is no
encrypted secure print job allocated to the
password that has been entered.
Print Prints the encrypted secure print jobs stored on the
HDD.
Delete Deletes the encrypted secure print jobs stored on
the HDD.
Stored Job Not Found This message is displayed when there is no secure
print job allocated to the password that has been
entered.
Print
Prints the secure print jobs stored on the HDD.
Delete
Deletes the secure print jobs stored on the HDD.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 284 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Menus]
Tray Conguration
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
MPTray Cong Paper Size A3Nobi
A3Wide
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
Legal14
Legal13.5
Legal13
Tabloid Extra
Tabloid
Letter
Letter
Executive
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
8K (260x368mm)
8K (270x390mm)
8K (273x394mm)
Statement
Sets the paper size for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Com-6 3/4 Envelope
Com-9 Envelope
Com-10 Envelope
Monarch Envelope
A2 Envelope
A6 Envelope
A7 Envelope
DL Envelope
C4 Envelope
C5 Envelope
Nagagata #3
Nagagata #4
Nagagata #40
Yougata #0
Yougata #2
Yougata #4
Kakugata #2
Kakugata #3
Kakugata #8
Index Card
A4Wide
A4Wide
B6Half
Custom
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 285 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
MPTray Cong X Dimension
*1
*1: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
2.5"
to
8.3"
to
13"
Sets the custom paper width for the Multi-Purpose
Tray.
64mm
to
210mm
to
330mm
Y Dimension
*1
*1: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
3.5"
to
11.7"
to
52.0"
Sets the custom paper length for the Multi-Purpose
Tray.
89mm
to
297mm
to
1321mm
Media Type
Plain
Letterhead
Transparency
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Card Stock
Rough
Glossy
Envelope
USERTYPE1
*1
USERTYPE2
*1
USERTYPE3
*1
USERTYPE4
*1
USERTYPE5
*1
USERTYPE6
*1
USERTYPE7
*1
USERTYPE8
*1
USERTYPE9
*1
USERTYPE10
*1
USERTYPE11
*1
USERTYPE12
*1
USERTYPE13
*1
USERTYPE14
*1
USERTYPE15
*1
USERTYPE16
*1
USERTYPE17
*1
USERTYPE18
*1
USERTYPE19
*1
USERTYPE20
*1
*1: USERTYPE 1-20 will be
displayed if registered.
Sets the paper type for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 286 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
MPTray Cong Media Weight Auto
Ultra Light
Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Heavy
Heavy
Ultra Heavy1
Ultra Heavy2
Ultra Heavy3
Ultra Heavy4
Ultra Heavy5
Sets the paper weight for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Tray Usage
Normal Tray
When Mismatching
Do Not Use
Sets how to use the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Normal Tray: (Tray selection/switching)
Use as regular tray.
When Mismatching:
If the output tray paper size or paper type is
different from the print data, print from the
Multi-Purpose Tray.
Do Not Use:
Auto tray selection and auto tray switching are
not possible.
However, if [Menu]>[Tray conguration]>[Paper
feed tray]>[Multi-Purpose Tray] is specied in
the control panel, operations will be the same
as regular trays (Uses the Multi-Purpose Tray as
the auto tray).
Tray1 Cong Paper Size
Cassette Size
Custom
Other Size
Sets the paper size for tray 1.
X Dimension
*1
*1: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
3.9"
to
8.3"
to
13.0"
Sets the custom paper width for tray 1.
99mm
to
210mm
to
330mm
Y Dimension
*1
*1: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
5.8"
to
11.7"
to
18.0"
Sets the custom paper length for tray 1.
147mm
to
297mm
to
457mm
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 287 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Tray1 Cong Media Type Plain
Letterhead
Transparency
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Card Stock
Rough
Glossy
USERTYPE1
*1
USERTYPE2
*1
USERTYPE3
*1
USERTYPE4
*1
USERTYPE5
*1
USERTYPE6
*1
USERTYPE7
*1
USERTYPE8
*1
USERTYPE9
*1
USERTYPE10
*1
USERTYPE11
*1
USERTYPE12
*1
USERTYPE13
*1
USERTYPE14
*1
USERTYPE15
*1
USERTYPE16
*1
USERTYPE17
*1
USERTYPE18
*1
USERTYPE19
*1
USERTYPE20
*1
*1: USERTYPE 1-20 will be
displayed if registered.
Sets the paper type for tray 1.
Media Weight
Auto
Ultra Light
Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Heavy
Heavy
Ultra Heavy1
Ultra Heavy2
Ultra Heavy3
Ultra Heavy4
Ultra Heavy5
Sets the paper weight for tray 1.
A3Nobi Paper
A3Nobi
A3Wide
Tabloid Extra
Set when using A3Nobi (328 x 453mm), A3WIDE
(320 x 450mm), or tabloid extra (12 x 18") paper
size in tray 1.
Legal14
Paper
Legal14
Legal13.5
Set when using legal14 (8.5 x 14") or legal13.5 (8.5
x 13.5") paper in tray 1.
A5LEF/A6/
Paper
A5
A6
Set when using A5
and A6 paper in Tray 1.
A5SEF Paper
A5 Set when using A5 paper in Tray 1.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 288 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Tray1 Cong Other Size
A4Wide
A4Wide
B6
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
8K (260x368mm)
8K (270x390mm)
8K (273x394mm)
Species other xed paper sizes in tray 1.
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The
optional
expansion
tray unit is
displayed
when
mounted.
Paper Size Cassette Size
Custom
Other Size
Sets the paper size for trays 2 to 5.
X Dimension
*2
*2: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
3.9"
to
8.3"
to
13.0"
Sets the custom paper width for trays 2 to 5.
99mm
to
210mm
to
330mm
Y Dimension
*2
*2: Displayed
when
[Paper size]
is set to
[Custom]
on the
control
panel.
5.8"
to
11.7"
to
18.0"
Sets the custom paper length for trays 2 to 5.
147mm
to
297mm
to
457mm
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 289 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The
optional
expansion
tray unit is
displayed
when
mounted.
Media Type Plain
Letterhead
Bond
Recycled
Card Stock
Rough
Glossy
USERTYPE1
*1
USERTYPE2
*1
USERTYPE3
*1
USERTYPE4
*1
USERTYPE5
*1
USERTYPE6
*1
USERTYPE7
*1
USERTYPE8
*1
USERTYPE9
*1
USERTYPE10
*1
USERTYPE11
*1
USERTYPE12
*1
USERTYPE13
*1
USERTYPE14
*1
USERTYPE15
*1
USERTYPE16
*1
USERTYPE17
*1
USERTYPE18
*1
USERTYPE19
*1
USERTYPE20
*1
*1: USERTYPE 1-20 will be
displayed if registered.
Sets the paper type for trays 2 to 5.
Media Weight
Auto
Ultra Light
Light
Medium Light
Medium
Medium Heavy
Heavy
Ultra Heavy1
Ultra Heavy2
Ultra Heavy3
Ultra Heavy4
Sets the paper weight for trays 2 to 5.
A3Nobi paper
A3Nobi
A3Wide
Tabloid Extra
Set when using A3Nobi (328 x 453mm), A3WIDE
(320 x 450mm), or tabloid extra (12 x 18") paper
size in trays 2 to 5.
Legal14 Paper
Legal14
Legal13.5
Set when using legal14 (8.5 x 14") or legal13.5 (8.5
x 13.5") paper in trays 2 to 5.
A5LEF/A6/
Paper
A5
A6
Set when using A5
and A6 paper in Trays 2 to 5.
A5SEF Paper
A5 Set when using A5 paper in Trays 2 to 5.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 290 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The
optional
expansion
tray unit is
displayed
when
mounted.
Other Size
A4Wide
A4Wide
B6
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
8K (260x368mm)
8K (270x390mm)
8K (273x394mm)
Species other xed paper sizes in trays 2 to 5.
Paper Feed
MPTray
Tray1
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The optional expansion
tray unit is displayed when
mounted.
Species the feed paper tray.
Auto Tray Switch
On
Off
Sets whether to switch automatically to another
tray when the paper in the current printing tray
runs out.
Tray Sequence
Down
Up
Paper Feed
Species the selection order of the tray when using
auto tray selection or auto tray switching.
Unit of Measurement
inch
millimeter
Species the units for custom paper sizes.
Duplex Last Page
Skip Blank Page
Always Print
Skip Blank Page:
Prints the nal page as 1-sided when using
2-sided printing on odd-numbered data pages.
Always Print:
Implements regular 2-sided printing.
Not operable with some applications.
System Adjust
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Power Save Time 1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Sets the time until the printer enters power save
mode.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 291 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Sleep Time 1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
60 minutes
Sets the time until the printer enters sleep mode
from power save mode.
Auto Power Off Time
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
4 hours
8 hours
12 hours
18 hours
24 hours
Sets the time until the printer enters OFF mode
from standby status.
Clearable Warning
ONLINE
Job
Sets the time until clearable warning display turns
OFF.
Auto Continue
On
Off
Sets whether to implement auto printer recovery
when a memory overow or tray request occurs.
Manual Timeout
Off
30 seconds
60 seconds
Sets the time to wait for the paper feed during
manual feed.
If paper is not set within the specied time, the job
is canceled.
Timeout print
Off
5 seconds
10 seconds
20 seconds
30 seconds
40 seconds
50 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
150 seconds
180 seconds
210 seconds
240 seconds
270 seconds
300 seconds
Sets the time from loss of the receipt of data until
force-printing.
With PS, the job is canceled without printing being
implemented.
Low Toner
Continue
Stop
Sets the printer operations when toner is detected.
Continue:
Print continuation is possible while online.
Stop:
Device is ofine.
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Sets whether to implement jam recovery print
when a jam occurs.
Setting [Off] cancels jobs that include pages to
which the jam occurs.
Error Report
On
Off
Sets whether to print error reports when an error
occurs in PCL, XPS, and PS.
Hex Dump Execute Prints the received data in hexadecimal format.
Turns OFF the power when the hexdump print
nishes.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 292 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Print Adjust
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Print Position
Adjust
MPTray X Adjust 0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals).
Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the direction
of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm intervals).
Duplex X Adjust 0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) when printing
the front during 2-sided printing.
Duplex Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the direction
of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm intervals) when
printing the front during 2-sided printing.
Overprint X
Adjust
*1
*1:
Displayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot
color overprinting.
Overprint Y
Adjust
*1
*1: D
isplayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (vertically) over the direction of
paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot color
overprinting.
Y Scaling
-0.25%
to
0.00%
to
+0.5%
Zoom the print image in the paper running
direction. (By 0.05%)
Tray1 X Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals).
Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the direction
of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm intervals).
Duplex X Adjust 0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) when printing
the front during 2-sided printing.
Duplex Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the direction
of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm intervals) when
printing the front during 2-sided printing.
Overprint X
Adjust
*1
*1:
Displayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot
color overprinting.
Overprint Y
Adjust
*1
*1:
Displayed with
C941/ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (vertically) over the direction of
paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot color
overprinting.
Y Scaling
-0.25%
to
0.00%
to
+0.5%
Zoom the print image in the paper running
direction. (By 0.05%)
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 293 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Print Position
Adjust
Tray2
*1
Tray3
*1
Tray4
*1
Tray5
*1
*1: The
optional
expansion
tray unit is
displayed
when
mounted.
X Adjust 0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals).
Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the
direction of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm
intervals).
Duplex X Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) when printing
the front during 2-sided printing.
Duplex Y Adjust
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position in the
direction of paper travel (vertically) (0.25mm
intervals) when printing the front during 2-sided
printing.
Overprint X
Adjust
*2
*2: Displayed
with C941/
ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (horizontally) over the direction
of paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot
color overprinting.
Overprint Y
Adjust
*2
*2: Displayed
with C941/
ES9541/
Pro9541 only.
0.00
to
±2.00mm
Adjusts the overall image print position
perpendicularly (vertically) over the direction of
paper travel (0.25mm intervals) during spot color
overprinting.
Y Scaling
-0.25%
to
0.00%
to
+0.5%
Zoom the print image in the paper running
direction. (By 0.05%)
Paper Black Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Implements ne adjustment if black or white
spots appear faded when printing on plain paper
in mono mode.
Lower the setting value if there are only fewer
white spots, or raise the setting value if the high-
density portion is thinner.
Paper Color Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Implements ne adjustment if color spots appear
faded when printing on plain paper in color mode.
Lower the setting value if there are only fewer
white spots, or raise the setting value if the high-
density portion is thinner.
Trans. Black Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Implements ne adjustment if black or white
spots appear faded when printing on transparency
in mono mode.
Lower the setting value if there are only fewer
white spots, or raise the setting value if the high-
density portion is thinner.
Trans. Color Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Implements ne adjustment if color spots appear
faded when printing on transparency in color
mode.
Lower the setting value if there are only fewer
white spots, or raise the setting value if the high-
density portion is thinner.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 294 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
SMR Setting Cyan 0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With cyan, compensates for print results variation
due to differences in the temperature and
humidity environments, print density, and print
frequency. Change the settings if there is burr in
the image.
Magenta
0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With magenta, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density, and
print frequency. Change the settings if there is
burr in the image.
Yellow
0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With yellow, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density, and
print frequency. Change the settings if there is
burr in the image.
Black
0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With black, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density, and
print frequency. Change the settings if there is
burr in the image.
White
*1
*1: Displayed when
[Admin Setup] >
[Spot Color] is set
to [White] on the
control panel for
C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542.
0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With white, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density, and
print frequency. Change the settings if there is
burr in the image.
Clear
*1
*1:
Displayed when
[Admin Setup] > [Spot
Color] is set to [Clear]
on the control panel
for C941/ES9541/
Pro9541.
0
+1
+2
+3
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
With clear, compensates for print results variation
due to differences in the temperature and
humidity environments, print density, and print
frequency. Change the settings if there is burr in
the image.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 295 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
BG Setting Cyan 0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With cyan, compensates for print results variation
due to differences in the temperature and
humidity environments, print density, and print
frequency. Change the setting if the underlay is
dark.
Magenta
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With magenta, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density,
and print frequency. Change the setting if the
underlay is dark.
Yellow
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With yellow, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density,
and print frequency. Change the setting if the
underlay is dark.
Black
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With black, compensates for print results variation
due to differences in the temperature and
humidity environments, print density, and print
frequency. Change the setting if the underlay is
dark.
White
*1
*1: Displayed when
[Admin Setup] >
[Spot Color] is set
to [White] on the
control panel for
C941/C942/ES9541/
ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542.
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With white, compensates for print results
variation due to differences in the temperature
and humidity environments, print density,
and print frequency. Change the setting if the
underlay is dark.
Clear
*1
*1:
Displayed when
[Admin Setup] > [Spot
Color] is set to [Clear]
on the control panel
for C941/ES9541/
Pro9541.
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
With clear, compensates for print results variation
due to differences in the temperature and
humidity environments, print density, and print
frequency. Change the setting if the underlay is
dark.
Drum Cleaning
On
Off
Sets whether to implement drum cleaning before
printing. The image quality may be improved.
Transfer Roller Cleaning Execute Implements cleaning of the transfer roller unit.
High Humid Mode
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Set if the paper curl after printing is conspicuous.
Try mode 2 if reduced paper curl effects are not
obtained after settings mode 1.
Setting mode 1 or mode 2 will increase the warm-
up time and reduce the print speed.
Moisture Control
On
Off
Sets whether or not to implement condensation
control.
If [On], completing the printing of 1 page may
take time.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 296 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Narrow Paper Speed Normal
Normal2
Slow
Sets the speed when printing on narrow paper.
Normal:
Print at a regular speed. Continuous printing
may cause intermittence.
Normal 2:
Print at a regular speed. Continuous printing is
less likely to cause intermittence than Normal
mode, but may be lower xing capability.
Slow:
Print at a slower speed. Intermittent printing
is less likely to occur.
Print Mode
Normal
Slow
Automatically switches the printing speed
according to the usage conditions of the printer
to avoid toner peeling.
Not switch if [Normal] is selected.
Transfer
Setting
Cyan Transfer Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for cyan, green and blue toner.
Raise the setting value if lateral-stripe dark dots
appear for cyan toner.
Magenta Transfer Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for magenta and red toner.
Raise the setting value if lateral-stripe dark dots
appear for magenta toner.
Yellow Transfer Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for yellow toner.
Raise the setting value if lateral-stripe dark dots
appear for yellow toner.
Black Transfer Setting
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for black toner.
Raise the setting value if lateral-stripe dark dots
appear for black toner.
White Transfer Setting
*1
*1: Displayed when [Admin
Setup]>[Color Setup]>[Spot
Color] is set to [White] on the
control panel for C941/C942/
ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542.
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for white toner.
Clear Transfer Setting
*1
*1: Displayed when [Admin
Setup]>[Color Setup]>[Spot
Color] is set to [Clear] on
the control panel for C941/
ES9541/Pro9541.
0
+1
+2
+3
-3
-2
-1
Lower the setting value if lateral-stripe white dots
appear for clear toner.
DV Roller Cleaning
On
Off
Adjust the toner disposal threshold.
On: Gives priority to image quality.
Off: Gives priority to toner life.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 297 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Admin Setup]
Note
z
To enter this menu, it is necessary to enter the [Password].
z
In the default factory settings, the administrator password is [aaaaaa].
Network Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
TCP/IP Enable
Disable
Enables/disables the TCP/IP protocols.
NetBIOS over TCP
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables the NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
EtherTalk
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables EtherTalk.
IP Address Set
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Auto
Manual
Sets whether to request the IP address from
the DHCP server.
IPv4 Address
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the IP address.
Subnet Mask
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the subnet mask.
Gateway Address
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx
Sets the gateway address.
Web
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using web browsers.
Telnet
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using TELNET.
FTP
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using FTP.
IPSec
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using IPSec.
SNMP
*
*: Displayed if [TCP/IP] in the control panel is set to
[Enable].
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using SNMP.
Network Scale
Normal
Small
Normal:
The printer will operate effectively even
if connected to a hub with spanning tree
functions. Small scale, however, is 2 to 3
PCs.
When connected to a small-scale LAN, the
printer startup time will be lengthened.
Small:
From small scale LANs with 2 or 3 PCs
to large scale LANs are covered, but if
connected to a hub with spanning tree
functions, operations may not be effective.
Gigabit Network
Enable
Disable
Sets whether to support a Gigabit network.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 298 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Hub Link Setting Auto
100Base-TX
Full
100Base-TX
Half
10Base-T Full
10Base-T Half
Sets the connection mode to the hub.
Network Factory Defaults Execute Restores the settings such as network, mail
server, LDAP server, and secure protocol
server, etc., to their default values.
USB Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
USB Enable
Disable
Enables/disables access using a USB interface.
Speed
480Mbps
12Mbps
Sets the maximum baud rate using a USB interface.
Soft Reset
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables the software reset command.
Serial Number
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables the USB serial number.
The USB serial number is used to identify USB
devices connected to a PC.
Ofine Receive
Enable
Disable
Sets whether to receive data even if ofine or a
recoverable error occurs.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 299 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Print Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Personality Auto
PCL
XPS
IBM PPR
EPSON FX
PostScript
Select the print language. Print language switching
is automatic when set to [Auto].
Copies
1
to
999
Sets the copy quantity.
This setting is disabled unless local print is set to
demo data.
Duplex
On
Off
Sets whether or not to implement 2-sided printing.
Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Sets the 2-sided print binding method.
Job Offset
On
Off
Sets whether to enable job offset.
Output Bin
Face Down
Face Up
Sets the output bin.
Media Check
Enable
Disable
Sets whether to enable the print data paper size
and the tray paper size mismatch.
A4/Letter Override
No
Yes
Sets whether to print by switching A4 to letter size
and letter to A4 size when there is no paper suited
to the print data size in the tray.
Resolution
600dpi
1200dpi
1200x600dpi multi-levels
Sets the resolution.
Toner Save Toner Save Level
Off
Low
Middle
High
Sets the toner ave quantity.
Species [Off] when toner save mode is disabled.
Color
All
Except 100%
Black
All:
All colors, including 100% black, comprise all
the target colors for toner saving.
Except 100% Black:
All colors, excluding 100% black, comprise all
the target colors for toner saving.
Mono-Print Mode
Auto
Color Mode
Normal Mode
Sets the monochrome page print mode.
Auto:
If the rst page is monochrome page or
monochrome page + spot color, print it by using
only the black image drum or black + spot color
image drum. If a color page appears, print it by
using the 4-color image drum and continue to
print even if monochrome page appears.
Color Mode:
The CMYK image drum always prints down, and
the clear and white image drums print down
from where the page is, including white or clear.
Normal Mode:
K image drums are normally printed down, and
other color image drums are down when printing
pages including those colors, and up when
printing pages that do not include such colors.
However, CMY image drums are down/up using
three colors.
Default Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the print orientation.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 300 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Form Length 5 lines
to
64 lines
to
128 lines
Sets the number of printable lines per page.
Edit Size
Cassette size
A3Nobi
A3Wide
A3
A4
A4
A5
A5
A6
B4
B5
B5
B6
Legal14
Legal13.5
Legal13
Tabloid Extra
Tabloid
Letter
Letter
Executive
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
16K (184x260mm)
16K (195x270mm)
16K (197x273mm)
8K (260x368mm)
8K (270x390mm)
8K (273x394mm)
Statement
Sets the edit size of the paper if the paper size has
not been specied from the PC. Disabled with PS.
Com-6 3/4 Envelope
Com-9 Envelope
Com-10 Envelope
Monarch Envelope
A2 Envelope
A6 Envelope
A7 Envelope
DL Envelope
C4 Envelope
C5 Envelope
Nagagata #3
Nagagata #4
Nagagata #40
Yougata #0
Yougata #2
Yougata #4
Kakugata #2
Kakugata #3
Kakugata #8
Index cards
A4Wide
A4Wide
B6Half
Custom
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 301 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Trapping Off
Narrow
Wide
Sets trapping.
X Dimension
2.5"
to
8.3"
to
13"
Sets the default custom paper width.
64mm
to
210mm
to
330mm
Y Dimension
3.5"
to
11.7"
to
52.0"
Sets the default custom paper length.
89mm
to
297mm
to
1321mm
PS Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Network Protocol ASCII
RAW
Sets the PS communications protocol mode for data
from the network.
USB Protocol
ASCII
RAW
Sets the PS communications protocol mode for data
from the USB.
PDF Paper Size
Tray Size
PDF Paper Size
Set the paper size when printing with PDF Direct
Print.
PCL Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Font Source Resident
Resident2
Downloaded
Sets the location of the fonts to be used.
Font Number
I0
C1
C2
C3
C4
S1
Sets the numbers of the fonts to be used.
Font Pitch
0.44CPI
to
10.00CPI
to
99.99CPI
Sets the font width.
Increases and reduces in 0.01 CPI units.
Displayed when the font selected using [Font No.]
is an outline font with xed spacing.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 302 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Font Height 4.00 point
to
12.00 point
to
999.75 point
Sets the font height.
Increases and reduces in 0.25 point units.
Displayed when the font selected using [Font No.]
is an outline font with variable spacing.
Symbol Set
WIN3.1J
PC-8
PC-8 Dan/Nor
PC-8 Grk
PC-8 TK
PC-775
PC-850
PC-851 Grk
PC-852
PC-855
PC-857 TK
PC-858
PC-862 Heb
PC-864 L/A
PC-866
PC-866 Ukr
PC-869
PC-1004
Pi Font
Plska Mazvia
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Ext
Serbo Croat1
Serbo Croat2
Spanish
UCS-2
Ukrainian
VN Int'l
VN Math
VN US
Win 3.0
Win 3.1 Arb
Win 3.1 L/G
Win 3.1 Blt
Win 3.1 Cyr
Win 3.1 Grk
Win 3.1 Heb
Win 3.1 L1
Win 3.1 L2
Win 3.1 L5
Wingdings
Dingbats MS
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
OCRB Subset2
HP ZIP
Select the symbol set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 303 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Symbol Set USPSFIM
USPSSTP
USPSZIP
Arabic-8
Bulgarian
CWI Hung
DeskTop
German
Greek-437
Greek-437 Cy
Greek-737
Greek-8
Greek-928
Hebrew NC
Hebrew OC
Hebrew-7
Hebrew-8
IBM-437
IBM-850
IBM-860
IBM-863
IBM-865
ISO Dutch
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L4
ISO L5
ISO L6
ISO L9
ISO Swedish1
ISO Swedish2
ISO Swedish3
ISO-2 IRV
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASC
ISO-10 S/F
ISO-11 Swe
ISO-14 JASC
ISO-15 Ita
ISO-16 Por
ISO-17 Spa
ISO-21 Ger
ISO-25 Fre
ISO-57 Chi
ISO-60 Nor
ISO-61 Nor
ISO-69 Fre
ISO-84 Por
Select the symbol set.
ISO-85 Spa
ISO-Cyr
ISO-Grk
ISO-Hebrew
Kamenicky
Legal
Math-8
MC Text
MS Publish
PC Ext D/N
PC Ext US
PC Set1
PC Set2 D/N
PC Set2 US
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 304 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
A4 Print Width 78 column
80 column
Sets the number of digits until an auto carriage
return on A4 paper.
White Page Skip
On
Off
Sets whether not to print blank pages.
CR Function
CR
CR+LF
Sets the operations when receiving CR codes.
LF Function
LF
LF+CR
Sets the operations when receiving LF codes.
Print Margin
Normal
1/5"
1/6"
Sets the are of the paper where printing is not
possible.
True Black
Off
On
Sets whether to print image data black using mixed
CMYK or print using black toner only.
Pen Width Adjust
On
Off
Compensates so that thin lines are visible.
Tray ID# MPTray
1
to
4
to
59
Species the number of the Multi-Purpose Tray
specication using the output specication
command in the PCL commands.
Tray1
1
to
59
Species the number of the tray 1 specication
using the output specication commands in the PCL
commands.
Tray2
*1
*1: The optional expansion
tray unit is displayed when
mounted.
1
to
5
to
59
Species the number of the tray 2 specication
using the output specication commands in the PCL
commands.
Tray3
*1
*1: The optional expansion
tray unit is displayed when
mounted.
1
to
20
to
59
Species the number of the tray 3 specication
using the output specication commands in the PCL
commands.
Tray4
*1
*1: The optional expansion
tray unit is displayed when
mounted.
1
to
21
to
59
Species the number of the tray 4 specication
using the output specication commands in the PCL
commands.
Tray5
*1
*1: The optional expansion
tray unit is displayed when
mounted.
1
to
22
to
59
Species the number of the tray 5 specication
using the output specication commands in the PCL
commands.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 305 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
XPS Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
DigitalSignature Print Invalid
Sign
Print Only
Valid Sign
Off
Print Invalid Sign:
If a document is falsied, a regular print and
falsication error report are printed.
Print Only Valid Sign:
If a document is falsied, a falsication error
report only is printed.
Off:
Signature authentication is not implemented.
DiscardControl
Auto
Each Page
Off
Auto:
Resources are liberated as necessary.
Each Page:
Resources are liberated per page according to the markup.
Off:
Discard Control function is disabled.
MC Mode
On
Off
Sets whether or not to use MC functions.
Unzip Mode
Auto
Speed
Print
Auto:
Mode is switched automatically according to the
le.
Speed:
Print speed is prioritized, and partial Unzip
functions are not used.
Print:
Print processing is prioritized, and partial Unzip
functions are used.
White Page Skip
On
Off
Sets whether not to print blank pages.
IBM PPR Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Character Pitch 10 CPI
12 CPI
17 CPI
20 CPI
Proportional
Species character pitch in IBM PPR emulation.
Font Condense
12CPI to
20CPI
12CPI to
12CPI
Species 12CPI pitch for Condense Mode.
Character Set
SET-2
SET-1
Sets a character set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 306 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Symbol Set IBM-437
IBM-850
IBM-860
IBM-863
IBM-865
PC Set1
PC Ext US
PC Ext D/N
PC Set2 US
PC Set2 D/N
Roman-8
ISO L1
PC-8
PC-8 Dan/Nor
PC-850
Legal
ISO-2 IRV
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASC
ISO-10 S/F
ISO-11 Swe
ISO-14 JASC
ISO-15 Ita
ISO-16 Por
ISO-17 Spa
ISO-21 Ger
ISO-25 Fre
ISO-57 Chi
ISO-60 Nor
ISO-61 Nor
ISO-69 Fre
ISO-84 Por
ISO-85 Spa
German
Spanish
ISO Dutch
Roman Ext
ISO Swedish1
ISO Swedish2
ISO Swedish3
VN Math
VN Int’l
VN US
PS Math
PS Text
Math-8
Pi Font
MS Publish
Win 3.0
DeskTop
Win 3.1 L1
MC Text
PC-852
Win 3.1 L5
Win 3.1 L2
CWI Hung
PC-857 TK
ISO L2
ISO L5
PC-8 TK
Sets a symbol set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 307 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Symbol Set Kamenicky
Hebrew NC
Hebrew OC
Plska Mazvia
ISO L6
Win 3.1 Heb
Win 3.1 Cyr
PC-866
Win 3.1 Grk
PC-869
PC-855
Greek-437
Greek-437 Cy
Greek-737
Greek-928
Serbo Croat2
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
PC-1004
Win 3.1 Blt
PC-775
Serbo Croat1
PC-858
Roman-9
ISO L9
Greek-8
Win 3.1 L/G
PC-851 Grk
PC-8 Grk
Hebrew-7
ISO-Hebrew
Hebrew-8
PC-862 Heb
ISO-Cyr
ISO-Grk
PC-866 Ukr
ISO L4
Sets a symbol set.
Letter O Style
Enable
Disable
Species the style that replaces φ (9B)and ¥ (9D)
with φ (ou) and Φ (zero).
Zero Character
Normal
Slashed
Species the style of 0 (zero).
SLASHED: SLASH ZERO
Line Pitch
6 LPI
8 LPI
Sets line space.
White Page Skip
On
Off
Sets ejecting or not ejecting a blank sheet.
Available only when simplex is set.
CR Function
CR
CR+LF
Sets performance when CR code is received.
LF Function
LF
LF+CR
Sets performance when LF code is received.
Line Length
80 column
136 column
Species the number of characters per line.
Form Length
11 inch
11.7 inch
12 inch
Species the length of paper.
TOF Position
0.0 inch
0.1 inch
~
1.0 inch
Sets the position from the top edge of paper.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 308 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Left Margin 0.0inch
0.1inch
~
1.0inch
Sets the amount to shift the horizontal print start
position to the right.
Fit to Letter
Enable
Disable
Sets the printing mode that can t print data,
equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in the LETTER-
size printable area.
Text Height
Same
Diff
Sets height of a character.
Continuous Paper Mode
On
Off
Sets to Landscape the edit direction of paper
supported by A3 printer.
EPSON FX Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Character Pitch 10 CPI
12 CPI
17 CPI
20 CPI
Proportional
Species character pitch.
Character Set
SET-2
SET-1
Species a character set.
Symbol Set
IBM-437
IBM-850
IBM-860
IBM-863
IBM-865
PC Set1
PC Ext US
PC Ext D/N
PC Set2 US
PC Set2 D/N
Roman-8
ISO L1
PC-8
PC-8 Dan/Nor
PC-850
Legal
ISO-2 IRV
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASC
ISO-10 S/F
ISO-11 Swe
ISO-14 JASC
ISO-15 Ita
ISO-16 Por
ISO-17 Spa
ISO-21 Ger
ISO-25 Fre
ISO-57 Chi
ISO-60 Nor
ISO-61 Nor
ISO-69 Fre
ISO-84 Por
ISO-85 Spa
Species a symbol set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 309 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Symbol Set German
Spanish
ISO Dutch
Roman Ext
ISO Swedish1
ISO Swedish2
ISO Swedish3
VN Math
VN Int’l
VN US
PS Math
PS Text
Math-8
Pi Font
MS Publish
Win 3.0
DeskTop
Win 3.1 L1
MC Text
PC-852
Win 3.1 L5
Win 3.1 L2
CWI Hung
PC-857 TK
ISO L2
ISO L5
PC-8 TK
Kamenicky
Hebrew NC
Hebrew OC
Plska Mazvia
ISO L6
Win 3.1 Heb
Win 3.1 Cyr
PC-866
Win 3.1 Grk
PC-869
PC-855
Greek-437
Greek-437 Cy
Greek-737
Greek-928
Serbo Croat2
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
PC-1004
Win 3.1 Blt
PC-775
Serbo Croat1
PC-858
Roman-9
ISO L9
Greek-8
Win 3.1 L/G
PC-851 Grk
PC-8 Grk
Hebrew-7
ISO-Hebrew
Hebrew-8
PC-862 Heb
ISO-Cyr
ISO-Grk
PC-866 Ukr
ISO L4
Species a symbol set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 310 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Letter O Style Enable
Disable
Species the style that replaces φ (9B)and ¥ (9D)
with φ (ou) and Φ (zero).
Zero Character
Normal
Slashed
Species the style of 0 (zero).
SLASHED: SLASH ZERO
Line Pitch
6 LPI
8 LPI
Sets line space.
White Page Skip
On
Off
Sets whether ejecting a blank sheet or not.
CR Function
CR
CR+LF
Sets performance when CR code is received.
Line Length
80 column
136 column
Species the number of characters per line.
Form Length
11 inch
11.7 inch
12 inch
Species the length of paper.
TOF Position
0.0 inch
0.1 inch
~
1.0 inch
Sets the position from the top edge of paper.
Left Margin
0.0 inch
0.1 inch
~
1.0 inch
Sets the amount to shift the horizontal print start
position to the right.
Fit to Letter
Enable
Disable
Sets the printing mode that can t print data,
equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in the LETTER-
size printable area.
Text Height
Same
Diff
Sets height of a character.
Continuous Paper Mode
On
Off
Sets to Landscape the edit direction of paper
supported by A3 printer.
Color Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Ink Simulation Off
SWOP
ISO Coated
Japan
Sets the ink simulation. This setting is enabled only
for PS language jobs.
UCR
Low
Medium
High
You can select the black plate (black) amount
during color printing.
Setting more black plate economizes on the toner
of the other three colors.
CMY 100% Density
Enable
Disable
Enables and disables 100% output over the CMY
100% shade values.
CMYK Conversion
On
Off
You can select the method of total toner amount
control for CMYK data. Select [Off] to disable the
GCR (Gray Component Replacement).
Further, this menu setting is disabled if using the
ink simulation function.
Spot Color
*1
*1: Displayed with C941/ES9541/Pro9541 only.
White
Clear
Displays the spot color information.
The setting is enabled after the printer is restarted.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 311 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Panel Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Near Life Status Enable
Disable
Sets the panel display control when a near life
warning occurs for the image drum, fuser unit, or
belt.
Near Life LED
Enable
Disable
Sets the alarm lamp ON control when a near life
warning occurs for the toner, image drum, fuser
unit, belt, or waste toner box.
Idle Display
Toner Gauge
Paper Size
Sets the information displayed in the standby
screen.
Panel Brightness During Operating
5
to
31
Adjusts the brightness (backlight luminosity) of the
control panel LCD.
The set brightness is applied during control panel
operations.
Panel Brightness While Power Save
0
to
1
to
31
Adjusts the brightness (backlight luminosity) of the
control panel LCD.
The set brightness is applied after the panel
backlight timer time has eplased from the last
operation.
Panel Backlight Timer
10
to
30
to
300
Adjusts the time (s) from the last operation to
when the panel brightness (during power save) is
applied.
Front Lamp
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Sets the printer front lamp operations.
Mode1:
Lit when in standby mode, ashes slowly during
processing, and ashes rapidly when an error
occurs.
Mode2:
Lit when in standby mode, ashes slowly during
processing, and OFF when an error occurs.
Off:
Normally OFF.
Time Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Date Format yyyy/mm/dd
mm/dd/yyyy
dd/mm/yyyy
Sets the date display mode.
Time Zone
-12:00
to
+0:00
to
+13:00
Sets the time difference from GMT in 15-minute
units. If the time zone setting is changed, the tome
differences before and after the change is reected
in the current time.
Memo
z
The factory default is set to +9.00.
Daylight Saving On
Off
Sets whether to display summertime.
On:
Advances the current time by 1 hour.
Off:
Turns back the current time by 1 hour.
Time Setting
2000/01/01 00 :00
to
2009/01/01 00 :00
to
2091/12/31 23 :59
Sets the time.
Memo
z
The factory default is to set the time.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 312 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
Power Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Power Save Enable
Disable
Enables/disables power save mode.
Sleep
Enable
Disable
Enables/disables sleep mode.
Auto Power Off
Enable
Auto Setting
Disable
Sets auto power OFF mode.
Others Setup
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
RAM Setup Receive Buffer Size Auto
0.5 MB
1 MB
2 MB
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
Sets the incoming buffer size that is assured by the
local interface.
Resource Save
Auto
Off
0.5 MB
1 MB
2 MB
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
Sets the resource saving area size.
Flash Memory
Setup
*1
*1: Displayed
when the
control panel
[Common
storage
settings]>
[Enable
initialization]
is set to [Yes].
Initialize Execute Initializes ash memory.
Resize PS Area nn% [n.n MB] Sets the Percentage of PS area in the ash memory.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 313 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
HDD Setup
*1*2*3
*1: Displayed
when the
control panel
[Common
storage
settings]>
[Enable
initialization]
is set to [Yes].
*2: Displayed
when [Boot
Menu]> [HDD
Setup]>
[Enable HDD]
in the control
panel is set to
[Yes].
*3: Displayed
when the HDD
is mounted.
Initialize Execute Initializes the HDD.
Resize
Partition
PCL nn% 20% Sets the partition size.
Common
mm%
50%
PS ll% 30%
<Apply>
Format Partition
PCL
Common
PS
Formats the selected partition.
Erase HDD Execute Deletes all HDD data such that it cannot be
recovered.
Storage
Common
Setup
*1
*1: Displayed
when the
HDD is
mounted.
Check File System
*2
*2: Displayed when
[Boot Menu]>[HDD
Setup]>[Enable HDD] in the
control panel is set to [Yes].
Execute Implements management data (FAT information)
recovery, and resolves mismatches between the
actual (free) space in the le system and the free
space displayed.
Check All Sectors
*2
*2: Displayed when
[Boot Menu]>[HDD
Setup]>[Enable HDD] in the
control panel is set to [Yes].
Execute Recovers defective sector information on the HDD
and le system nonconformances.
Enable Initialization
No
Yes
Sets whether or not to authorize setup changes
concomitant with HDD and ash memory
initialization.
Security
Setup
*1
*1: Displayed
when the
HDD (option)
is mounted
and [Boot
Menu] >
[HDD Setup]
>[Enable
HDD] is set to
[Yes] on the
control panel.
Job Limitation Off
Encrypted job
Sets the job restriction mode controls.
If [Job encryption] is selected, non-encrypted
secure prints will be discarded.
Make Secure HDD
*2
*2: Displayed when [Storage
Common Setup]>[Enable
Initialization] is set to [Yes]
on the control panel and the
HDD encryption is disabled.
Execute Enables the data encryption function stored on
the HDD. All data stored on the HDD to date
will become unrecoverable when this process is
implemented.
Make Normal HDD
*3
*3: Displayed when [Storage
Common Setup]>[Enable
Initialization] is set to [Yes]
on the control panel and the
HDD encryption is enabled.
Execute Unlocks the data encryption function stored on
the HDD. All data stored on the HDD to date
will become unrecoverable when this process is
implemented.
Reset Cipher Key
*3
*3: Displayed when [Storage
Common Setup]>[Enable
Initialization] is set to [Yes]
on the control panel and the
HDD encryption is enabled.
Execute Regenerates the encryption key used in the
encrypted HDD. All data stored on the HDD to date
will become unrecoverable when this process is
implemented.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 314 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Language
Setup
Language Initialize Execute Deletes the message les that have been
downloaded.
Font Setup Font Output Mode
JIS90
JIS2004
Sets the font output mode.
Job Cancel
Setup
Cancel Key Behavior
Short
Long
Off
Sets the operations when the device [CANCEL]
button is pressed.
Short:
Press and hold for 2s max. to cancel the print job.
Long:
Press and hold for 2 to 5s to cancel the print job.
Off:
Disables the [CANCEL] button.
Inquiry Display
On
Off
Sets whether to display the enquiry screen when a
job is canceled.
Focus Position
Yes
No
Sets whether to apply [Yes] or [No] focus for
selection in the job cancellation enquiry screen.
Display Timeout
60
to
180
to
300
Sets the display timeout value for the enquiry
screen when a job is canceled.
Settings
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Reset Settings Execute Restores the user menu settings to the factory
settings.
Save Settings Execute Saves the current menu settings.
Restore Settings
*1
*1: Displayed when [Save Settings] is executed on
the control panel.
Execute Changes the saved menu settings.
Change Password
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
New password
****************
Sets a new password to be entered in the
[Administrator menu] and [Boot Menu].
Verify Password
****************
Sets a new password to be entered in the
[Administrator menu] and [Boot Menu] for which
[New password] has been set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 315 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Print Statistics]
Note
z
To enter this menu, it is necessary to enter the [Password].
z
In the default factory settings, the password is [0000].
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
JOB LOG Enable
Disable
Enables/disables the totalization function.
Supplies Report
*1
*1: Not displayed if [Usage Report] is set to
[Disable] on the control panel.
Enable
Disable
Sets whether or not to display the number of
consumables replacements.
Reset Main Counter
*1
*1: Not displayed if [Usage Report] is set to
[Disable] on the control panel.
Execute Resets the main counter aggregate value.
Consumables counter reset
*1*2
*1: Not displayed if [Usage Report] is set to
[Disable] on the control panel.
*2: Not displayed if [Supplies Report] is set to
[Disable] on the control panel.
Execute Resets the number of consumables replacements.
Change
Password
*1
*1: Not
displayed
if [Usage
Report]
is set to
[Disable] on
the control
panel.
New Password **** Sets the new password to be entered in [Print
Statistics].
Verify Password **** Sets a new password to be entered in the [Print
Statistics] for which [New Password] has been set.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 316 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Calibration]
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Auto Density Mode On
Off
Sets whether to automatically compensate density
and shade.
Auto BG Adjust Mode
*1
*1: Displayed if [Auto Density Mode] in the
control panel is set to [ON].
Off
-1
0
+1
+2
Compensates for print results variation due to
differences in the temperature and humidity
environments, print density, and print frequency.
Changes the value if there is burr in the image or
the underlay is dark.
Density Adjustment Media
Standard Media
Special Media
Sets the density adjustment to suit the media used.
Standard Media:
For the media of standard thickness to be
printed at high speed.
Special Media:
For the thick or special media to be printed at
low speed.
Adjust Density Execute Implements density compensation. Implement
when the device is in standby mode.
Adjust Registration Execute
Implements auto color misalignment compensation operations.
Implement when the device is in standby mode.
Heavy Media Adjust Off
-5
to
0
to
+15
Compensates the xing speed during card stock
printing.
Heavy Media Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the card stock mode. Suppresses misalignment of
the image training edge during card stock printing.
Enabled for ultra card stock 4 and ultra card stock 5.
Color Density Cyan Density
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the cyan density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
Magenta Density
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the magenta density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
Yellow Density
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the yellow density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
Black Density
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the black density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
White Density
*2
*2: Displayed when using
white toner in C941/C942/
ES9541/ES9542/Pro9541/
Pro9542.
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the white density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
Clear Density
*3
*3: Displayed when using clear
toner in C941/ES9541/
Pro9541.
-3
to
0
to
+6
Adjusts the clear density.
This setting is enabled from printing after the
density compensation has been implemented.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 317 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Print Color Tuning Pattern Execute Prints patterns to match the shading characteristics.
Base Color
Tuning
Highlight
A-1
A-2
B-1
B-2
to
O-1
O-2
Matches the color balance for the parts displayed as
most clear in the highlight area of the printed color
matching pattern.
The matching results are reected in the highlight
matching values for cyan, magenta, and yellow
matching.
Mid-Tone
A-1
A-2
B-1
B-2
to
O-1
O-2
Matches the color balance for the parts displayed as
most clear in the mid-tone area of the printed color
matching pattern.
The matching results are reected in the mid-tone
matching values for cyan, magenta, and yellow
matching.
Dark
A-1
A-2
B-1
B-2
to
O-1
O-2
Matches the color balance for the parts displayed
as most clear in the dark area of the printed color
matching pattern.
The matching results are reected in the dark
matching values for cyan, magenta, and yellow
matching.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 318 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Fine Color
Tuning
Cyan Tuning Highlight -4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the highlights (light areas) of the cyan
shade characteristics.
Mid-Tone
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the intermediate areas of the cyan shading
characteristics.
Dark
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the dark (dark areas) of the cyan shade
characteristics.
Magenta
Tuning
Highlight
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the highlights (light areas) of the magenta
shade characteristics.
Mid-Tone
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the intermediate areas of the magenta
shading characteristics.
Dark
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the dark (dark areas) of the magenta
shade characteristics.
Yellow Tuning Highlight
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the highlights (light areas) of the yellow
shade characteristics.
Mid-Tone
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the intermediate areas of the yellow
shading characteristics.
Dark
-4
to
0
to
+4
Matches the dark (dark areas) of the yellow shade
characteristics.
Black Tuning Highlight
-3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the highlights (light areas) of the black
shade characteristics.
Mid-Tone
-3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the intermediate areas of the black
shading characteristics.
Dark
-3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the dark (dark areas) of the black shade
characteristics.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 319 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Reset Color Tuning Execute Resets the CMYK color matching.
White
Tuning
*1
*1: Displayed
when
white toner
is used
in C941/
C942/
ES9541/
ES9542/
Pro9541/
Pro9542.
Highlight -3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the highlights (light areas) of the white
shade characteristics.
Mid-Tone
-3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the intermediate areas of the white
shading characteristics.
Dark
-3
to
0
to
+3
Matches the dark (dark areas) of the white shade
characteristics.
1
2
3
5
4
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
- 320 -
Table of setting items in the device setup screen
[Boot Menu]
Note
z
To enter this menu, press and hold the [OK] button while turning ON the power supply.
z
To enter this menu, it is necessary to enter the [Password].
z
In the default factory settings, the administrator password is [aaaaaa].
z
This menu is displayed in English only.
z
Shaded areas are factory-set values.
Item Details
Network Factory Defaults Execute Implements network menu initialization.
HDD Setup
*1
*1: Displayed
when the
HDD is
mounted.
Enable HDD No
Yes
Sets whether to start the printer viewing the HDD
is not mounted when the HDD is actually mounted.
Storage
Common
Setup
*1*2
*1: Displayed
when the
HDD is
mounted.
*2: Displayed
when
[Enable
HDD] in
the control
panel is set
to [Yes].
Check File System Execute Implements management data (FAT information)
recovery, and resolves mismatches between the
actual (free) space in the le system and the free
space displayed.
Check All Sectors Execute Recovers defective sector information on the HDD
and le system nonconformances.
Menu Lockout
On
Off
Sets whether not to display menus other than the
Secure Print/Encrypted Secure Print in the control
panel.
Panel Lockout
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Sets whether to disable the operations buttons on
the control panel.
- 321 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel.
Network
Setup
Matching
colors
Using Utility
Software
Appendix
Using Print Job Accounting …………… 322
Character code table
…………………… 323
- 322 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Using Print Job Accounting
z
Using Print Job Accounting
Note
z
The optional print job accounting is required.
z
Upgrading the print job accounting software may lead to different descriptions from the text herein.
z
If print job accounting has been added to the device, print by enabling "JobAccounting: ON" in the device setup print.
z
See “Settings details” (P.265).
Number of usable user IDs and logs
The number of user IDs that can be registered and the number of logs that can be saved using the
factory settings are described below. These numbers may be reduced depending on the log details.
Number of user
IDs that can be
registered
Number of logs that can be saved
5000ID
With the (optional) HDD mounted: 5,000
With the (optional) HDD not mounted: 550
- 323 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
z
Character code table
PostScript mode
Standard Latin fonts
- 324 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
Symbol
Wingdings-Regular
- 325 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
ZapfDingbats
Hoeer Text Ornaments
- 326 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
PCL mode
Note
z
If printing using application software, the application may use unique character code tables.
Symbol set
PC-8
PC-8 Dan/Nor
PC-8 Grk
PC-8 TK
PC-775
PC-850
PC-851 Grk
PC-852
PC-855
PC-857 TK
PC-858
PC-862 Heb
PC-864 L/A
PC-866
PC-866 Ukr
PC-869
PC-1004
Pi Font
Plska Mazvia
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8
Roman-9
Roman Ext
Serbo Croat1
Serbo Croat2
Spanish
UCS-2
Ukrainian
VN Int'l
VN Math
VN US
Win 3.0
Win 3.1 Arb
Win 3.1 L/G
Win 3.1 Blt
Win 3.1 Cyr
Win 3.1 Grk
Win 3.1 Heb
Win 3.1 L1
Win 3.1 L2
Win 3.1 L5
Wingdings
Dingbats MS
Symbol
OCR-A
OCR-B
OCRB Subset2
HP ZIP
USPSFIM
USPSSTP
USPSZIP
Arabic-8
Bulgarian
CWI Hung
DeskTop
German
Greek-437
Greek-437 Cy
Greek-737
Greek-8
Greek-928
Hebrew NC
Hebrew OC
Hebrew-7
Hebrew-8
IBM-437
IBM-850
IBM-860
IBM-863
IBM-865
ISO Dutch
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L4
ISO L5
ISO L6
ISO L9
ISO Swedish1
ISO Swedish2
ISO Swedish3
ISO-2 IRV
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASC
ISO-10 S/F
ISO-11 Swe
ISO-14 JASC
ISO-15 Ita
ISO-16 Por
ISO-17 Spa
ISO-21 Ger
ISO-25 Fre
ISO-57 Chi
ISO-60 Nor
ISO-61 Nor
ISO-69 Fre
ISO-84 Por
ISO-85 Spa
ISO-Cyr
ISO-Grk
ISO-Hebrew
Kamenicky
Legal
Math-8
MC Text
MS Publish
PC Ext D/N
PC Ext US
PC Set1
PC Set2 D/N
PC Set2 US
WIN3.1J
PCL Heisei Single-Byte (WIN3.1J)
- 327 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
Symbol
Wingdings
- 328 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Character code table
Memo
- 329 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Index
- 330 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
A
Adjusting density watermarks .................... 122
Adjusting ultra ne lines ........................ 71, 72
Administrator menu .................................. 297
Administrator passwords ........................... 273
Administrator setup .................................. 231
Auto density compensation mode ............... 120
Auto tray selection ......................................90
Auto tray switching ............................ 104, 105
B
Basic ..........................................................2
Black nish .............................................. 137
Black Finish ............................................. 137
Black overprint ......................................... 142
Booklets .................................................... 65
C
Changing passwords ................................. 314
CMY 100% density ................................... 310
Collate ................................................ 95, 97
Color Correct Utility
Color samples ...........................150, 155
Color samples for matching
...151, 155, 156
Compensating gamma and hue ....158, 161
Deleting setup les ....................168, 169
Reading setup les .....................165, 167
Saving settings to a le ..............163, 164
Specifying palette colors .............150, 154
Test printing
.............. 151, 152, 155, 157, 159, 162
Color matching
Automatic ........................................ 128
Graphic Pro ...................................... 133
No Color Matching ............................ 135
Ofce colors ..................................... 130
Color misalignment
compensation (manual) ......................... 120
Color Swatch Utility .................................. 172
Consumables and maintenance unit ............ 277
Controlling control panel buttons ................ 274
Controlling control panel menus ................. 275
Cover Printing ............................................92
Creating pamphlets ....................................65
D
Dark ....................................................... 125
Date and time .......................................... 311
Dates ...................................................... 311
Density compensation (auto) ..................... 120
Density compensation (manual) ................. 121
Device information ............................210, 231
Device settings screen .............................. 278
DHCP server
Setting devices ................................. 225
Setting servers ................................. 224
Direct printing .......................................... 261
Downloading PostScript les ...................... 108
Downloading PostScript les to the device .... 109
E
E-mail receiving settings ........................... 212
E-mail sending settings ............................. 213
Easy Guide (Set-up Guide) ............................2
Emulation mode ....................................... 109
Encrypted communications .................235, 239
Encrypted jobs ...........................................80
Encrypted Secure Print ................................ 78
Encryption (SSL/TLS) ................................ 220
Enlarging to print across several sheets .........63
EtherTalk ................................................. 211
Changing printer names .................... 260
Changing zone names ....................... 260
F
Face-down stacker ...................................... 85
Face-up stacker ..........................................85
Fine line adjustment ...................................69
Flash memory initialization ........................ 312
Freeing the PC from print processing ........... 106
- 331 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
G
General network setup .............................. 210
H
HDD initialization ...................................... 313
Highlight ..........................................124, 127
I
IBM PPR Setup ......................................... 305
ICC proles ......................................145, 174
IEEE802.1X ......................................218, 256
IP address ............................................... 184
IP ltering ............................................... 219
IP lters .................................................. 246
IPP ......................................................... 217
IPSec ...............................................221, 239
J
Job list .................................................... 232
Job Spool ................................................ 108
M
MAC address ............................................ 247
MAC address ltering ................................ 220
Mac OS X utilities
Network Card Setup Utility ................. 210
NIC settings tool ............................... 207
Panel language setup ........................ 204
Print job accounting client .................. 205
Mail notications ...............................249, 251
Maintenance ............................................ 222
Manually-fed printing ..................................87
Manuals
Marks and Symbols ...............................3
Separate Conguration ..........................2
Menu lockout ........................................... 275
Menu Lockout .......................................... 275
Mid-Tone ................................................. 125
Mono printing .......................................... 110
Multi-page printing ............................... 88, 89
Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................... 77
Multipurpose tray is handled
as manual feed ................ 23, 28, 35, 41, 48
N
NetBIOS over TCP .................................... 212
Not printing underlines or shading ................67
O
Orientation
Printing on face-down print surfaces ......85
Printing on face-up print surfaces ..........85
Overlay printing ....................................... 101
Overlaying stamps to print ...........................93
P
Panel lockout ........................................... 274
Panel Lockout .......................................... 274
Paper size ..................................................97
Paper Size Setup ........................................63
Paper sizes that can be used
in 2-sided printing ..................................56
Paper sizes that can be used
in 2-sided printing ..................................47
Paper supporter ................................... 61, 62
Paper trays ................................................85
Paper Weight .............................................47
Passwords ............................................... 233
Photo Enhance ...........................................69
Preventing line blurring ...............................71
Print quantity ........................................... 276
Print totalization results ............................. 268
Printable custom sizes ................................. 47
Printer buffer ........................................... 106
Printer drivers
Changing default settings .................. 113
Deleting .......................................... 114
Mac OS X PS printer drivers .................18
Saving settings ................................. 111
Updating ......................................... 115
Using saved settings ......................... 112
Windows PCL printer drivers .................16
- 332 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Windows PS printer drivers ..................14
Windows XPS printer drivers ................17
Printer information ................................... 279
Printing .......................................... 35, 41, 48
Custom media .................................... 52
Envelopes (irregular sizes) ...................28
Envelopes (regular sizes) .....................23
Glossy ...............................................35
Labels, Transparencies.........................41
User-dened paper sizes ......................47
Printing black using black toner only ........... 137
Printing color matching patterns ..........123, 126
Printing colored text naturally vividly .............69
Printing ne lines naturally vividly ........106, 107
Printing orientations alternately .................... 54
Printing pages individually ...........................87
Printing PDF les without using the printer
drivers ................................................ 261
Printing photos naturally vividly .................... 69
Printing PostScript errors .............................63
Printing ProQ2400 ......................................67
Printing reports/lists
Demo pages..................................... 270
Error logs ........................................ 268
File list ............................................ 266
Font list ........................................... 267
Network information ......................... 267
Print totalization results ..................... 268
Scan to log ...................................... 269
Test printing ..................................... 265
User media list ..........................269, 270
Printing separations in CMYK ...................... 148
Printing using registered forms ................... 101
Printing using shades of black and white ...... 140
Prioritizing print speed using low resolution ....67
Prole assistant ........................................ 173
R
Reducing several pages to
1 sheet for printing .................................54
Removing color parts ..................................67
Rendering colored lines inconspicuous ......... 143
Rendering white lines inconspicuous .....142, 143
Rotate Sort function ....................................97
S
Saved jobs ................................................71
Saving print jobs to the device .....................99
Scaling prints ............................................. 61
Secure Print ...............................................76
Security .................................................. 219
Separation printing ................................... 148
Setting networks to factory settings ............ 223
Setting passwords in print jobs ..........76, 78, 99
Setting the resolution ..................................67
Setup Manual ...............................................2
SNMP ...............................................216, 227
SNMP Trap ............................................... 216
SNMPv3 .................................................. 254
SNTP ...................................................... 218
Sort printing ..............................................95
Specifying 1st page print method............ 92, 93
Specifying toner consumption amount ...........58
SSL/TLS .................................................. 235
Synthesizing and printing black using CMYK
toner .................................................. 137
T
TCP/IP .................................................... 211
Time zones .............................................. 311
Toner economy mode .................................. 58
Toner save ........................................... 59, 60
Trapping .................................................. 143
Tray Switch .............................................. 103
Troubleshooting/Daily Maintenance Manual ......2
TrueType fonts ..................................... 73, 75
U
Uses custom sizes .................................... 271
Using custom media ...................................52
Using fonts
PC ....................................................75
- 333 -
1
2
3
4
5
Convenient print
functions
Appendix Index
Checking and
Changing Printer
Settings Using
the Control Panel
Network
Setup
Matching
Colors
Using Utility
Software
Printer...............................................73
Using the BOOTP environment .................... 226
W
Watermarks ............................................... 93
Web browser .....................................210, 229
Items table ...................................... 231
Login .............................................. 230
Web printing ............................................ 222
Windows utilities
Change the Printer Display Language
... 192
Conguration Tool ......................180, 210
Direct Network Printing Utility (LPR) .... 194
Network Extension ............................ 201
PDF Print Direct ................................ 187
Print job accounting client .................. 188
Web Driver Installer .......................... 203
Writing print data to les ........................... 107
X
XPS settings ............................................ 305
www.okiprintingsolutions.com
Oki Data Corporation
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,Tokyo
108-8551, Japan
August 2015
45582202EE Rev6
323


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Oki C911 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Oki C911 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 38,16 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Oki C911

Oki C911 User Manual - English - 141 pages

Oki C911 Additional guide - German - 336 pages

Oki C911 User Manual - German - 141 pages

Oki C911 Additional guide - Dutch - 105 pages

Oki C911 User Manual - Dutch - 141 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info